External Fire Fighting System: Technical Manual & Drawings

Technical Manual & Drawings
For Working
External Fire Fighting System
FFS Order no: F 505286 A~H

Customer: Mark Marine & Investments - FZCO
Shipyard: Mark Marine & Investments - FZCO
Hull no.: MM001/002/003/004,

MM005/006/007/008.
Vessel Type: 40m Utility / Support Vessel
Fi-Fi Class: Bureau Veritas

Fire Fighting Ship-E
Fire Fighting System (Far East) Pte Ltd

10K Enterprise Road
Enterprise 10
Singapore 629836
cont
Project no. F505286A~H

Item 00 Engineering & documentation
01 Monitors
02 Control System
03 Foam Inductor
04 NA
05 NA
06 Fire Pump
07 NA
08 NA
09 Input Coupling
10 Valves/Compensator
11 Commissioning
12 Certificates
13 NA
Project No.: F505286A~H
DATA SHEETS Customer ref.: -
1 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
MONITORS Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,
Shipyard: Mark Marine & Investments - FZCO Hull no.: MM005/006/007/008.
Type of vessel: 40m Utility / Support Vessel Vessel Class BV

Vessel name: - Fi-Fi Class Ship E
PROJECT ITEM NO. 01

CONTENTS
Item No: Qty Type Description Sheet No
01 2 FFS 600 LB 350 m3/h / 10.0 bar 2
01A Rev Date: 07/03/2023
MONITORS Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 2
ITEM NO. 01 FFS 600 LB

General information
Quantity 2
Monitor series FFS 600 LB cap: 350 m3/h
Operation Electrical operation
Manufacturer Fire Fighting Systems AS
Design Criteria
Fluid Sea Water
Flange standard DN150 DIN
Pressure class PN16
Technical data
Dual Flow function NA
Nozzle type Pelton
Deflector Yes
Capacity Full 350 m3/h
Throw length -Capacity Full >75 m
Reaction force -Capacity Full 4375 N
Capacity Reduced NA m3/h
Throw length -Capacity Reduced NA m
Reaction force -Capacity Reduced NA N
Inlet pressure 10 bar
Power supply operation 400-460VAC/ 50/60Hz/ 3ph + 24VDC
Weight 90 kg
Protection class IP 56
Elevation max - 20 / +80 deg
Rotation max 300 deg
Material
Body and branch pipe Ni-Al-Bronze
Nozzle AISI-316L
Other parts AISI 316L / GRP / POM(plastic)
Surface Treatment
Base Primer
Coating RAL 3002, Red
Documentation
Works Test Yes
Type approval Yes
Approval NA
Data sheet FFS 290
Dimensional drawing FFS106A-23sheet2
Throw curve FFS-300 16-544
Assembly drawing w/partslist NA
Instruction manual FFS-659 & 665
Electrical wiring diagram F505286_C1/C2/C3
FFS-290
www.fifisystems.com Rev.03
Monitor
FFS 600LB
Description
The FFS designed, manufactured and tested fire water monitors were originally developed to withstand harsh
marine environment and to deliver sea water. Several thousand units of these monitors are currently in
operation worldwide.
The FFS monitors offer a unique combination of high performance in relation to weight and dimensions.
The units are extremely robust and require minimal maintenance.
By using state-of-the-art fluid dynamics software, we have designed a range of monitors with minimal internal
pressure losses in combination with excellent throw characteristics well within Fi-Fi 2 requirements.
Material for main castings is nickel-aluminium-bronze with superb strength and corrosion resistance. Stainless
steel (AISI 316L) and composites are used for smaller components. Ball bearings for elevation and horizontal
movements are made from high grade stainless steel and permanently grease filled. They are sealed from
both internal water pressure and atmosphere by O-rings. The monitor is protected by a lightweight GRP cover,
which can easily be removed.
Main castings and machining of parts are all done in Scandinavia. Each monitor is assembled, pressure– and
function tested in our 8,000 sq. m. (85,000 sq. feet) factory in Sweden with highly qualified personnel and the
latest ISO 9001 management system.
The dual flow mechanism is operated by water pressure. The components are well protected against external
damage as integrated parts of the castings.
Our monitors have type approvals and certifications from a wide range of classification societies.
The vertical and horizontal movements are operated by electrical motors via gearboxes. All gears are
completely sealed from the surroundings, thus eliminating accidental contact. Robust hand wheels made from
composites and stainless steel provide manual back-up operation for the monitor movements.
Product subjected to technical changes without prior notice. 1 of 2

Contact us
ffs@fifisystems.com +47 69 24 49 90 [HQ] Fire Fighting Systems AS ● Årvollskogen 21, 1529 Moss, Norway
FFS-290
Monitor
FFS 600LB
Performance Data Key Features

Monitor Type FFS 600LB - High quality Stainless Steel / Ni-Al Bronze materials
Nominal Flow 600 m3/h - Sea water compatible
Nominal Pressure 10 barg (145 psi) - GRP monitor cover
- Moulded nitrile O-rings for sealing
Rotation 300°
- Compact design
Elevation -20° to +80°
Weight 90 kg
Inlet flange DN150 / PN16 DIN2526 Form A
Other Characteristics
Ingress Protection IP56
- Coating RAL 3002
Operation Electrical with manual override
- Hydrostatic test at 20 barg
Spray deflector Electrical operation - Certified FAT
Limit switches Easily adjusteble
Power supply 380-440V 3phase 50/60Hz +24VDC
Dual flow Electrical operation on/off
Options
- Manual operation by hand wheels
- 360º Rotation
- Capacity ?
- Stepless (Dual flow)

Contact us
6 5 4 3 2 1
819 D
1063
317 502 223 840
D D
791
2
86
466
227
C C
170
DN150 DIN PN16
722
JUNCTION BOX
B B
Rev .n o : Da t e : I s s u e d by : A ppr ov e d b y : P r o je c t i o n :
Orig inal D at e : I s s u e d by : Ap proved by:
00 27.09.2007 RS OIB
FFS 600LB
D e s c r i pt i o n Dra wing no.:
A A
Dimensional Drawing 106A-23 sh.2

D Sy s t e m P l ac e o f i s s u e :
FFS/NORWAY
Sca le :
1:10
Orig .size:
A3
6 5 4 3 2 1
FFS-300 16-544
Rev. 00
FI-FI MONITOR THROW CURVE

MODEL: FFS300
SEA WATER FLOW: 350 m3/h
MINIMUM HORIZONTAL RANGE AT WIND STILL CONDITIONS
100
90
80
Throw Length (m)
70
60
50
40
30
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Pressure (bar)
Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
N-1502 MOSS e-mail: ffs@fifisystems.com
NORWAY www.fifisystems.com
Doc no: FFS-659 rev03 Original instructions
Installation and Maintenance
Fire Water Monitor

FFS 3600
FFS 2400
FFS 1200
FFS 600
Manufacturer
Fire Fighting Systems AS
Tykkemyr 27, 1597 Moss, Norway
Phone: +47 69244990
E-mail: ffs@fifisystems.com
Internet: www.fifisystems.com

Tykkemyr 27 E-mail: ffs@fifisystems.com
1597 Moss www.fifisystems.com
Norway
Page 2 of 23
Table of Contents
1. PICTOGRAMS SHOWN ON MONITOR 3
2. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION AND WARNINGS 4
3. COMPANY PRESENTATION 5
4. DESCRIPTION FFS FIRE WATER MONITOR 6
4.1. Fire water monitor main components (remotely controlled) 7
4.2. Fire water monitor main components (manually controlled) 8
4.3. Identity plate 8
4.4 Noise levels 9
4.5. Work area/sector 9
5. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 10
5.1. Transport 10
5.2. Installation 10
5.3. Before using monitor 10
5.4. Using monitor 10
5.5. After using monitor 10
5.6. During maintenance 10
6. INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE 11
7. LIFTING INSTRUCTIONS 12
7.1. Sizes FFS 1200 series and smaller 12
7.2. Sizes FFS 2400 series and larger 13
8. GENERAL INFORMATION FOR INSTALLATION 14
8.1. Mechanical installation 15
8.2. Installation on mobile units 16
8.3. Electrical installation 17
8.3.1. Special conditions (CE, ATEX, etc.) 17
9. ADJUSTING LIMIT-SWITCHES 18
10. START-UP AND COMISSIONING 19
11. TROUBLESHOOTING 20
12. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY CE/ATEX (IF APPLICABLE) 21
13. APPENDIX 1 – WIRING DIAGRAM CE/ATEX (IF APPLICABLE) 22
14. APPENDIX 2 – ELECTRICAL DATA CE/ATEX (IF APPLICABLE) 23

Norway
Page 3 of 23
1. Pictograms shown on monitor
Attention and caution.
Do not stand in front of the monitor while running.
Read and understand user manual.
Bonding point.
Lifting point.

Norway
Page 4 of 23
2. Important Safety Information and Warnings
Pay attention to the various important warnings listed below.
Warning! Means potential risk of serious damage to personnel or objects.
Modifications and operation of the monitor performed by unauthorized personnel disclaims FFS
responsibility of any personal injury or property damage.
Product development is continuously updating, so products may be subjected to technical changes without
prior notice.
More details regarding the various issues are given in the following pages of this manual.
Warning! Make sure the monitor nozzle is pointing in safe direction before starting the system.
Warning! Keep safe distance from the high velocity water jet coming from fire water monitor
nozzle.
Warning! Operator must always have clear view of the total fire water monitor working area
during operation.
Warning! Make sure power supply is disconnected and water supply is shut off before doing any
repair or maintenance work.
Warning! Use proper safety gear when handling fire water monitor.
Warning! It is the customer responsibility that fire water monitor foundation and support are
properly engineered.

Norway
Page 5 of 23
3. Company presentation
Fire Fighting Systems (FFS) is the leading designer, maker and supplier of complete systems for external
fire-fighting in the marine market. FFS provide complete packages comprising all services and equipment
exclusive piping required for installations onboard tugs, offshore vessels, fire boats and work boats in
accordance with all class societies. FFS also provide complete systems for onshore fire-fighting on tank
farms, refineries, industrial plants, jetties etc.
FFS Design uses the latest technology to achieve a lean and green profile to each product as well as the
complete system.
Product range comprises pumps with drivers, gearboxes, fire water monitors, foam mixers, deluge systems,
remote control systems and all related equipment for a complete package.
For land-based systems FFS can deliver everything from single units to complete systems with
performance guarantee based on our in-house engineering. Our wide range of pumps and monitors can
deliver from 5000 l/min up to 80.000 l/min of foam or water. A wide range of pump drivers can be
delivered for mobile or fixed installations. Complete equipped mobile units or fixed installations can also
be delivered.
The monitors are manufactured and tested in our factory in accordance with the highest quality standards.
FFS production is based on the highest standard available. A strongly motivated workforce is trained to
secure the quality required for safety systems at sea and onshore in high technology environments under
ISO9001 QA conditions.
FFS Service engineers are available from our global network.

Norway
Page 6 of 23
4. Description FFS fire water monitor
This instruction provides information of FFS manufactured fire water monitor models: FFS 600, FFS 1200,
FFS 2400 and FFS 3600. The name corresponds to the monitors nominal working capacity, FFS 600
equals 600m3/h, but the capacity may vary depending on nozzle size. All models can be delivered in
several different types. The actual unit(s) supplied may not include all features described in this instruction.
FFS monitors offer a unique combination of high performance in relation to weight and dimensions. The
units are extremely robust and require minimal maintenance.
The monitor flow channels are designed using the latest technology in fluid engineering. Hence, low
pressure loss is achieved, and the throw characteristics are well within marine Fi-Fi 1, 2 and 3
requirements.
Material for main castings is nickel-aluminum-bronze with superb strength and corrosion resistance.
Stainless steel (AISI 316L) and composites are used for smaller components. The monitor is painted with
red color coating (RAL 3002). Ball bearings for elevation and horizontal movements are made from high
grade stainless steel and permanently grease filled. They are sealed from both internal water pressure and
atmosphere by O-rings. The monitor is normally protected by a lightweight cover, which can easily be
removed.
The vertical and horizontal movements are operated by electrical motors via gearboxes. All gears are
completely sealed from the surroundings, thus eliminating accidental contact. Robust hand wheels made
from composites and stainless steel providing manual back-up operation for the monitor movements.
The various models in the FFS monitor range can also be supplied as manually operated monitors.
In these cases, the rotation and elevation of monitor is done by two hand wheels connected to shafts via
gear wheels. All additional function can also be operated manually by hand wheel. The gears are self-
locking for any horizontal, elevation or additional functions.
Monitors can be equipped with various nozzles:

Standard: Monitors with solid jet for long distance fire-fighting. Nozzle is equipped with a deflector to
spread the water jet.
Jet-Screen: Monitors with possibility to either have a hollow jet for long distance fire-fighting, or a wide
conical screen that can be used either for self-protection as well as short distance fire-fighting.
Monitors can be equipped as Single, Dual or Stepless Flow type. Dual Flow offers a reduced water flow-
setting at typical foam fire-fighting applications. Stepless Flow offer an adjustable flow-setting between
reduced and full flow-setting.
For safety precautions, installation and maintenance, see relevant chapters.

Norway
Page 7 of 23
4.1. Fire water monitor main components (remotely controlled)
Jet-Screen
Deflector nozzle
Standard Lifting points

nozzle Limit-switch
rotation
Handwheel
rotation
Limit-switch
elevation
Gearmotor
elevation
Gearmotor
rotation
Solenoid valve
Dual/Stepless flow
Handwheel
elevation Inlet flange
Id-plate
Junction box
Safety switch
Cover

Norway
Page 8 of 23
4.2. Fire water monitor main components (manually controlled)
Handwheel
deflector Handwheel
rotation
Lever
Dual flow Handwheel
elevation
4.3. Identity plate
CE/ATEX
marking
(if applicable)
Monitor
model
Monitor type Year of

manufacture
Serial number
Monitor
Certification weight
number
Test-pressure
Working at factory
pressure
Optional
Flow information
Capacity

Norway
Page 9 of 23
4.4 Noise levels
The noise levels are based on testing according to the European Norm SS-EN ISO 11201.
Type FFS 600 FFS 1200 FFS 2400 FFS 3600

Nominal water capacity (m3/h) 600 1200 2400 3600
A-weighted emission sound pressure 72,5 74,0 72,5 73,5

level at workstation (dBA)
4.5. Work area/sector
Note!
With manually operated monitors, and remotely operated monitors in manual override, it is possible to
rotate the monitor 360°. Be highly aware of any obstacles as people, buildings etc. in the surroundings
when in use.
Note!
If the monitor is mounted on a platform, mobile unit etc., make sure to add clearance according to laws and
regulations outside the monitors work area to prevent risk of crushing.
General dimensions of the monitor are stated in the order specific documentation.
When the fire water monitor is in operation, the water impact area must be carefully observed by the
operator. The maximum throw length is stated in the order specific documentation. Note that the water
impact force can be very dangerous to personnel, as well as potentially causing serious damage to objects
and structures. Many monitors therefore have the option of reducing the direct impact force by activating
the actuator to spread the water jet, or activating the screen function to get a wide conical screen. In these
cases, the spray pattern will also cover a larger area.
Limit-switches (if used) are provided and needs to be set individually in each specific case, to limit
monitors operating sector for remotely operation.

Norway
Page 10 of 23
5. Safety precautions
Note!
This instruction must be followed closely. In addition, monitor operation manual, local safety and work
protection regulations are to be taken into consideration. Ensure that all operators are properly trained and
understand this instruction and operation manual before use to prevent accidents.
Installation instructions and setting of operating sectors must be followed and completed prior to running
the fire water monitor in remote control mode.
Be sure that no person come in contact with the water jet under any circumstances.
5.1. Transport
Equipment supplied by FFS shall only be transported if it is prevented, hindered and limited to risks of
damage to life, health, property, goods or the environment that may occur. Center of gravity (CG) is
marked on the crate. Make sure to handle it correctly. Lifting equipment must be connected to the monitor
before being released from the crate to prevent risk of tipping over.
Symbol
for CG
5.2. Installation
The installation must be performed by qualified personnel and must comply with the instructions described
in chapter 8.
Only approved and certified lifting equipment to be used for lifting operation. Make sure to follow the
lifting instructions described in chapter 7.
5.3. Before using monitor
The system integrator / end user is required to do a risk assessment to inform and prevent any security
risks. Make sure that the work area is cleared.
5.4. Using monitor
Keep away from moving parts of the monitor to avoid injuries. Do not stand in front of the monitor before
the valve for the water supply is closed (risk of high waterjet/water pressure), serious risk of injury or death
may occur.
5.5. After using monitor
Make sure the monitor is ready to be used on short notice and that all functions are in good working order.
Make sure that any observed deviations are reported and corrected. Contact Fire Fighting Systems AS if
needed.
5.6. During maintenance
Maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel. Make sure that the power supply is disconnected
and that the water supply is shut off before doing any repair or maintenance work.

Norway
Page 11 of 23
6. Inspection/ Maintenance
Note!
If service or maintenance is performed, original spare parts supplied by FFS must be used. Inform FFS
monitors serial number when ordering spare parts.
Contact: spareparts@fifisystems.com
Note!
If service or maintenance has been performed on the monitor, it must be operated remotely and without
water before it can be set in to duty. This is to ensure that the monitor is within its operating sectors.
Make sure that the power supply is disconnected and that the water supply is shut off before doing any
Detailed inspection of the monitor is recommended to be carried out monthly;

Inspect the monitor carefully for improper or unauthorized adjustments etc. or any signs of damages or
other deviations. Check for visible damages on coating, repair if needed.
The oil level of the gear-motors is not necessary to check; permanent lubrication is provided.
All bearings are permanently grease filled so re-lubrication is NOT needed.
On manual monitors, it is recommended to re-grease the threaded rod for deflector mechanism on a regular
basis.
The monitor must be operated electrically or manually on a regular basis, at least once a month to ensure
that the monitor is in good working order and to prevent load damages. All functions of the monitor are
required to be operated. Operation check can be done with or without water supply (it is recommended to
do it with water supply on). This is carried out by running the monitor to its end stops (6x), Rotation (2x),
Elevation (2x), Deflector (2x), all additional functions are also required to be operated.

Norway
Page 12 of 23
7. Lifting instructions
Start by removing cover (if applicable) to access the lifting points (remember to mount cover after lifting).
Only use approved and certified lifting gear for performing lifting operation.
When lifting the monitor either from the crate or onto the monitor standpipe, never attach lifting gear to the
monitor nozzle. This could cause damage to the unit.
7.1. Sizes FFS 1200 series and smaller
Available equipment: 2 soft slings + lifting device suitable for weights according to id-plate.
A lifting instruction is also permanently attached to the monitor nozzle.
Use soft slings around the monitor body as shown below. If necessary, the hand wheel for nozzle elevation
can be rotated to adjust the monitor centre of gravity during lifting.

Norway
Page 13 of 23
7.2. Sizes FFS 2400 series and larger
Available equipment: Lifting gear + lifting device suitable for weights according to id-plate.
Attach lifting gear to the lifting points, as shown below.
Use all three lifting points at the same time. If necessary, the hand wheel for elevation can be rotated to
adjust the monitor centre of gravity during lifting.
Lifting
points
x3

Norway
Page 14 of 23
8. General information for installation
The monitor foundation and standpipe must be dimensioned in each specific case depending upon the
actual installation. Monitors can be installed on mobile units as well as permanent installations. Guidelines
for foundation/standpipe design shall be applicable to rules and regulations regarding requirements for
stress and deformation calculations of mechanical equipment.
Design and production of foundation/standpipe, must be performed by personnel with relevant engineering
competence. When building the foundation/platform/standpipe make sure that there are no objects within
the monitors operating area.
The order specific documentation gives input to foundation-calculations by providing information of

weights, dimensions, reaction forces and other relevant data of the various monitor sizes. The image below
is showing a typical arrangement for monitor foundation/standpipe.
When installing monitor FFS 2400 or FFS 3600 it is recommended that the FFS supplied docking bracket
is mounted. The docking bracket is to be mounted outside the monitors normal operating sector.
Monitor
Standpipe
Reducer
Valve

Norway
Page 15 of 23
8.1. Mechanical installation
Note!
Make sure the customer supplied standpipe has correct dimensions and is designed according to monitor
weight and reaction force. The counter-flange surface must be flat and free from burrs and scratches to
secure good sealing function. Check flatness of flange before monitor is lifted into position.
If a shut-off valve is installed just before the monitor, the swing-out for the disc must not interfere with the
monitor inlet flange. A concentric butterfly-valve is recommended installed min 0,5m before the monitor.
Note!
Make sure the complete piping system from pump inlet to fire water monitor is free from any internal
debris. This may cause serious damage to monitor internal parts at high water velocities.
The monitor is intended to be mounted on a vertical standpipe. Check to see that the interface flange on the
standpipe matches the inlet flange on monitor base.
Place a standard gasket on the standpipe flange and make sure that the correct number of fasteners are
available. Make sure that the gasket is in place between the two flanges before the bolts are inserted. Use
high quality gasket material suitable for fire water service. The gasket dimensions must be according to
pressure class and nominal flange dimension.
Lift the monitor onto the standpipe by use of suitable lifting slings and a crane according to lifting
instruction described in chapter 7. Do not detach the lifting equipment before the monitor is fastened
securely onto the standpipe.
All data and installations must be verified by the customer to ensure correct and safe installation.
Minimum requirements for flange bolts: Class 8.8.
The flange bolts shall be tightened in steps to avoid tilting of flange and in cross-sequence up to the
recommended torque according to bolt class and size.

Norway
Page 16 of 23
8.2. Installation on mobile units
Note!
When mounting a monitor on a mobile unit, pay special attention to the monitors high reaction force. The
reaction force is stated in the order specific documentation.
The monitors FFS 2400 and FFS 3600 are supplied with a docking bracket as part of standard delivery.
The bracket should be mounted to the surrounding structure and will unload the gravity forces generated
by the monitor nozzle. This is recommended on mobile units like trucks, trailers, boats etc. since vehicle
movements can cause stress to gear wheels carrying the monitor nozzle. This can potentially reduce the
lifetime of the gear motors.
The support bracket is delivered with 4 pre-drilled mounting holes.
Example of docking bracket below.
Docking bracket

Norway
Page 17 of 23
8.3. Electrical installation
Before installing the monitor, make sure that the sign plate data corresponds to the power supply and
operating condition and that the installation complies with the manufactures recommendations.
Install the electrical junction box in centre of horizontal operation sector and at the opposite side of the
nozzle allowing the flexible cable to move freely in both directions. Use two of the flange bolts to fasten
the bracket.
If limit-switches are to be used, direction of monitor movement must be confirmed. Make sure that monitor
rotation to left is connected via left limit switch, rotation to right is connected via right limit switch,
elevation upwards is connected via upper limit switch, and elevation downwards via lower limit switch.
Limit-switches use Normally Closed (NC) contacts that break the control circuit when switch is activated.
How to adjust the limit-switches are described in chapter 9.
8.3.1. Special conditions (CE, ATEX, etc.)
All external electrical connections are to be connected according supplied wiring diagram attached as
Appendix 01 and inside cover of the junction box.
Data for the electrical equipment mounted on the monitor is to be found attached as Appendix 02.
The supplier of the control system for the monitor must arrange installation according to local laws and
regulations. The monitor is equipped with a safety switch near the junction box. This is to disconnect
control system when doing mechanical maintenance or manual operation.
For all other electrical work on the monitor, power supply must be switched off and secured.
Bonding must be provided. Bonding point is located on the monitor inlet flange, marked with a blue decal.
The potential-equalizing connections to the monitor and surrounding installation must be sized with a
suitable cross-section area and made in compliance with local laws and regulations.
Note!
To make the monitor ATEX-compliant, the limit switches must be connected through EX-barriers in the
control system

Norway
Page 18 of 23
9. Adjusting limit-switches
Note!
If limit-switches are to be used, adjusting the operating sectors must be followed and completed prior to
running the monitor.
Remove the monitor cover (if applicable). Unscrew the black lids on the limit-switches, turn by hand.
Inside the limit-switches there are two sensors (micro-switch or inductive switch) together with adjustable
cams, one for each direction (left, right, up, down).
The outer cam must be pushed down and rotated into position, and the inner cam must be pulled up and
rotated into position. Make sure that cams are firmly in its position after adjustment.
Orient the nozzle in each maximum direction.

Start by setting the relevant cam so the top of the cam is on the opposite side if the sensor. Rotate cam until
sensor is activated:
Left: outer sensor, rotate cam clockwise

Right: inner sensor, rotate cam counter clockwise
Up: outer sensor, rotate cam clockwise
Down: inner sensor, rotate cam counter clockwise
Confirm that all directions are properly adjusted by running the monitor remotely. Small adjustments may
be necessary on the cams.
Mount lids on limit-switches and monitor cover (if applicable).
Outer sensor
Inner sensor
Adjustable cams

Norway
Page 19 of 23
10. Start-up and comissioning
Note!
Read operation manual before starting the monitor.
Note!
Keep away from moving parts of the monitor to avoid injuries.
1 Remove monitor cover (if applicable).

2 Check that all bolts and screws that have been adjusted or relocated are firmly fixed. Follow the
instructions given in this chapter.
3 Check the equipment against material specification and order confirmation to ensure that voltage
rating etc. is corresponding to the available power connection. Check also the water capacity and
pressure rating.
4 If limit-switches are to be used, check that the settings of operating sectors are corresponding to the
safe areas of operation. Study instructions in chapter 9.
5 After adjustment, a new functional test without water is recommended before monitor is tested with
water.
6 Run the system according to instructions given in operation manual. Make sure there are no water
leakage.
7 Verify that the maximum pressure of the monitor is not exceeded.
8 If foam concentrate has been used, flush the monitor with fresh water afterwards.

Norway
Page 20 of 23
11. Troubleshooting
The monitor is made to meet the highest requirements for reliability. If the operations and maintenance
instructions are followed properly, malfunction or deviating performance should not be expected. If any
trouble is encountered, this guide can be of use.
Observation:
Monitor does not move or moves slowly/unevenly during remote control operation.
1 Check power supply to control circuits.

2 Check if motor protection is tripped.
3 Make sure the monitor is not positioned in any extreme position (limit-switches activated).
4 Check for foreign objects in monitors inlet and main body.
5 Check flange for flatness, and that flange bolts are evenly torqued.
6 Check functionality of electrical control system.
7 Run the monitor in manual operation mode to exclude possibility of mechanical failure.
If none-of the above suggested investigations lead to any conclusion, contact FFS for consultation.
Observation:
Monitor does operate, but outside the pre-set operation sector during remote control operation.
Stop operating the monitor immediately since permanent mechanical damage may occur!
1 This problem may occur if service or repair has been performed and the phase on the terminals on the
3-phase electrical system has been changed. In this case, the directions of rotation for the electrical
motor may have changed; up become down and/or left becomes right.
2 Check if the limit-switches are correctly set or if they are damaged.

Norway
Doc no: FFS-665 rev02 Original Instructions
Operation Manual
Fire Water Monitor

FFS 3600
FFS 2400
FFS 1200
FFS 600

Norway
Page 2 of 6
Pictograms shown on monitor
Attention and caution.
Do not stand in front of the monitor while running.
Read and understand user manual.
Bonding point.
Lifting point.

Norway
Page 3 of 6
Important Safety Information and Warnings:
Pay attention to the various important warnings listed below.
Warning! Means potential risk of serious damage to personnel or objects.
Modifications and operation of the monitor performed by unauthorized personnel disclaims FFS
responsibility of any personal injury or property damage.
More details regarding the various issues are given in the following pages of this manual.
Warning! Make sure the monitor nozzle is pointing in safe direction before starting the system.
Warning! Keep safe distance from the high velocity water jet coming from fire water monitor
nozzle.
Warning! Operator must always have clear view of the total fire water monitor working area
during operation.
Warning! Make sure power supply is disconnected and water supply is shut off before doing any
Warning! Use proper safety gear when handling fire water monitor.
Warning! It is the customer responsibility that fire water monitor foundation and support are
properly engineered.

Norway
Page 4 of 6
Operation
How to operate depends on if the monitor is remotely or manually controlled. The general procedure is
very much the same, so read the general instruction together with instruction regarding either remotely or
manually controlled.
General
Note!
Do not stand in front of the monitor before the valve for the water supply is closed (risk of high waterjet/
water pressure).
Control system must be operated in such a way that max. water pressure is not exceeded. That means
correct pump speed in relation to opening/closing of valves, numbers of water consumers in use etc.
Installation instructions and setting of operating sectors must be followed and completed prior to running
the monitor.
If docking station is used, the monitor needs to be manually operated into its normal working sector before
starting.
Monitor start up
1 Orient the nozzle of the monitor in such a direction that the water jet cannot cause injury or damage.
2 Activate the water supply.
3 Fill up the piping system up to the monitor slowly to prevent any water hammering. This can
typically be done by having a small by-pass pipe from pump, running the pump at very low speed or
having a small valve opening. The water shall be seen flowing out of nozzle before main valve can
be opened and/or pump speed increased. Note that water hammer can cause serious damage to the
equipment and pose risk to personnel.
4 Orientation of the jet can now easily and accurately be operated.
Monitor shut off
1. De-activate the water supply slowly.

2. Orient the monitor into the desired park position.
3. If risk for subzero weather condition, the nozzle shall be directed downwards below horizontal level
to drain the monitor.
After use
Make sure the monitor is ready to be used on short notice, and that all functions are in good working order.
Make sure that any observed deviations are reported and corrected.

Norway
Page 5 of 6
Remotely controlled monitor

Note!
Make sure that the manual crank handle on the handwheels are folded in before remote operation
Make sure no personnel can be in accidental contact with moving parts when switching between manual
and remote fire water monitor control.
The electric remote control can be done from a fixed or remote control panel. For details see separate
documentation from the control system supplier.
Manual override mode
The manual override mode serves as a backup possibility of the monitor in case of a power supply failure
of the control circuits. This can be used with or without water supply to the monitor.
Activating manual override
1. Make sure power supply is disconnected by using the safety switch located near the junction box.
2. Release the crank handles located inside the hand wheels of the gear-motors; these are spring loaded
and must be folded out.
3. The monitor is now ready to be operated manually. To alter the orientations of the monitor, turn the
hand wheel accordingly.
4. If dual flow; locate the solenoid valve under the monitor nozzle. To regulate the flow, the valve is
equipped with a manual override. Press the grey knob and rotate 90° to inner position.
Deactivating manual override
1. To prepare the monitor for electric remote control, make sure that the monitor is in normal working
sector defined by the limit-switches.
2. Crank handles must be folded into the hand wheel in their standby fold in position.
3. Connect the power supply by using the safety switch near the junction box.
4. Activate the monitor control system if that is included in the local procedures.

Norway
Page 6 of 6
Manually controlled monitor
The manually operated monitor is operated by hand-wheels and levers.
To move the monitors orientation, turn hand-wheels located at elevation gear and rotation gear. Direction
of rotation on hand-wheels versus monitor movement varies from model to model.
If dual flow, the regulation of the flow is operated by a lever on the dual flow valve located under the
monitor nozzle. Turn lever right to full flow, downwards to reduced flow, and left to stop in any position
between full and reduced.
If deflector, the movement of the deflector is operated by a hand-wheel located at the monitor nozzle. Turn
counter-clockwise to engage deflector, and clockwise to disengage deflector.
If Jet-Screen, the alteration between jet- and screen-function is operated by a hand-wheel located at the
monitor nozzle. Turn counter-clockwise to engage jet-function, and clockwise to engage screen-function.

Norway
2 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
CONTROL SYSTEM Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 02

CONTENTS
02 1 PLC Control system for two monitors and two valves 2

02A Rev Date: 07/03/2023
CONTROL SYSTEM Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 2
ITEM NO. 02 Control system

General information
Quantity 1
System series 2 x FFS 600 (Cap: 350m3/h)
Type PLC - 10" Touch screen panel (x2)
Manufacturer Fire Fighting Systems AS / Siemens / Beijer
Design Criteria
PLC Simatic S7
Software Siemens Simatic S7
Gear/clutch control/monitoring item 678 - 1 unit
Monitors control/monitoring item 01 - 2 units
Foam pumps control/monitoring NA
Engine control/monitoring External, yard supply
Valve control item 10 - 2 units
Valve monitoring item 10 - 2 units
Pressure monitoring item 678 - 1 unit
Level monitoring NA
Temperature monitoring item 678 - 1 unit
Technical data
Cabinet: F505286_C1
Dimensions 760x600x210
Weight 40 kg
Material Steel
Coating RAL 7035, Light Grey
Bridge control panel: F505286_C1
Portable control panel: F505286_C1 c/w 15m cable length
General
External DC power 24 VDC
External AC power 400-460VAC/ 50/60Hz/ 3ph
External AC power valves 230VAC/ 50/60Hz/ 1ph
Documentation
Block diagram F505286_C1
Wiring diagram F505286_C2&C3
General data Partslist no. F505286A~H
Instruction manual FFS777
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Postal address:
Årvollskogen 21, 1529 Moss
Norway
B B
Tel: +47 69 24 49 90
E-mail: ffs@fifisystems.com
www.fifisystems.com
C C
FI-FI CONTROL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
DRAWING No: 7604034
D D
DESCRIPTION: 2MSF-1G-2V-2Beijer10-MOD-BV
PROJECT No.: F505286A~H
E
YARD/CUSTOMER: Mark Marine & Investments FZCO E
YARD HULL No.: MM001~MM008
Project Engineer: RTE
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ F
Sheet 1
Rev. Modifications Date Name Apr. Of 35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTENTS
A A
FRONT PAGE SHEET 1
CONTENT LIST SHEET 2
C1
TOPOLOGY SHEET 1
CABINET DIMENSIONS SHEET 2
CABINET COMPONENTS SHEET 3
BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL SHEET 4
PORTABLE PANEL SHEET 5
B PLUG PORTABLE PANEL SHEET 6

B
C2
SUPPLY FROM SHIP SHEET 1
WIRING TO BRIDGE PANEL SHEET 2
VALVES SHEET 3
FEEDBACK VALVES SHEET 4
MONITOR 1 SHEET 5
MONITOR 2 SHEET 6
CLUTCH 1 SHEET 7
SHIP INTERFACE SHEET 8
POWER DISTRIBUTION 400VAC SHEET 9
C C3 C
PWR. DISTRIBUTION 110/220VAC SHEET 1
PWR. DISTRIBUTION 24VDC SHEET 2
CONTROL VOLTAGE 24VDC SHEET 3
INTERFACE BRIDGE PANEL SHEET 4
INTERFACE PORTABLE PANEL SHEET 5
OVERVIEW PLC CARD SHEET 6
FUSE LIST
MAIN CONTROL CABINET SHEET 1
INTERNAL WIRING LIST

D WIRING LIST
WIRING LIST
SHEET 1
SHEET 2
D
WIRING LIST SHEET 3
REFERENCE LIST
BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL SHEET 1
MONITOR SHEET 5
PORTABLE SHEET 6
YARD WIRING LIST

E CABLE LIST SHEET 1 E
CABLE LIST SHEET 2
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
FI-FI CONTROL SYSTEM
Document type F
2MSF-1G-2V-2Beijer10-MOD-BV
Drawing number Sheet 2
CONTENT LIST 7604034
Rev. Modifications Date Name Apr. Next
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE 1:
ALL CABLING SHOWN ARE TO BE SUPPLIED BY YARD
Cable cross-sections must be verified/corrected by yard to 2 x Joystick for Monitor
2 x Switch for Fog/Jet
comply with local rules and safety standards before installation
A Note 2
Bridge Control Panel A
Profinet Cable must NOT
Panel supplied with 15m cable
be placed together with
and plug J3, socket P3
cables for 380-480VAC
MINIMUM 30CM APART X22 -P2 -Plug J3/P3
NOTE 3:
ONLY APPROVED CABLE
-W52
FOR PROFINET TO BE USED. PLUG P1 AND P2 SUPPLIED
-W5
-W6
PREFERRED TYPE: SIEMENS
Profinet Cable
BY FFS
Industrial Ethernet FC TP Marine Cable
B B
2x2x0.34mm
10x1.5+E
13x1.5+E
6XV1840-4AH10
Note 2 & 3
Main Control Cabinet
X7 -P1 X8
C X1 X2 X3 C
-W50
-W10
-W20
-W21
-W30
-W31
-W40
-W32
-W33
-W11
-W1
-W2
-W3
-W4
(or Yard to decide)

20x1.5+E-SH
3x1.5+E
2x2.5+E
2x2.5+E
2x2.5+E
4x1.5+E
4x1.5+E
4x1.5+E
4x1.5+E
6x1.5+E
10x1.5+E
8x1.5+E
6x1.5+E
10x1.5+E
to Monitors
SUPPLY: 220-230V 1AC 16A for 220V Valves

SUPPLY: 110-120V 1AC 16A for 110V Valves
D D
Back-Up/emergency SUPPLY: 24VDC 10A
Ref. C2 Drawings
SUPPLY: 380-415 3AC 50Hz 10A
SUPPLY: 440-480 3AC 60Hz 10A
Safety and maintenance Safety and maintenance

switch mounted by switch mounted by
monitor monitor
Control Voltage 24VDC 10A
S S
FF FF
-W30.1
-W32.1
SIGNAL TO/FROM SHIP
CONTROL SYSTEM
E FI-FI Clutch 1 E
M
~ 6x1.5+E
6x1.5+E
Pump Unit 1
M
~
YARD SUPPLY MOTOR 1 PHASE OPEN/CLOSED

TO FI-FI SYSTEM VALVES SWITCHES VALVES
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Fi-Fi CONTROL SYSTEM
Document type F
C1
2MSF-1G-2V-2Beijer10-MOD-BV Fi-Fi BLOCK DIAGRAM Drawing number Sheet 1
TOPOLOGY 7604034
Rev. Modifications Date Name Apr. Next 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
Details for mounting

4 off (each corner)
20 Control Cabinet
Door Stay
ø9.25
20
B B
Surface finish: Light Grey RAL7035
760mm
Seal: IP66, NEMA 4
Weight: 40kg
C C
D D
600mm 210mm
Bottom view
37.5
187.5
113
E E
37
51 498 51
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C1
CABINET DIMENSIONS 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+Main Control Cabinet

Door
A A
12 12
- ~
-V1 11 11
~ + 13 13 13 13 13
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
21 21 21 21 21
14 14
1
2
4
3
-F0 -F0B -F9
-K7
-K8
-F10
-F1 -F3 -F4 -F8 -F10
-F9
-F3
-F4
-F8
~
-Y1
+
-V2
-X2:1
1
2
4
3
~
-
4
3
1
B A2- A2-
B
-Z1
-Z21
-Z4
-Z2
22 22 22 22 22
-A2
-Z3
~ 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
+ A1+ A1+ 14 14 14 14 14
-V3
-Z20
~ -
10.1"
1 R1 R3 3 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1 1 R1 R3 3 A1
-K3:1 -K3:2 -K4:1 -K4:2 -K10:1 -K10:2

-Y2
2 R2 R4 4 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2 2 R2 R4 4 A2
C C
DQ ST RQ NO ST
8x24VDC/0,5A 4x120VDC-230VAC/5A
-U1 -U2
-BU-Cover
-U1
-1M1
-2M1
-1M2
-2M2
-1A1
-1A3
-1A4
-1A5
-1A6
-1A7
-1A2
-1A8
-U2 -1A1-1A2-1A3-1A4-1A5-1A6-1A7 -1A8
-BU-Cover
-Y3
-1M1
-2M1
1
2
2
3
8
-1M2
-2M2
-X10
-X1
CC02
1 21 21 21 21 2
1 21 21 21 2
3 43 43 43 43 4
3 43 43 43 4
5 65 65 65 65 6
5 65 65 65 6
7 87 87 87 87 7 87 87 87 8
-Z15
-Z17
-Z19
8
-Z16
-Z18
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 109 10
9 10 9 10 9 10
9 10
1L+ 1M 11 1211 1211 1211 1211 11
12
1211 12 11 12
1L+ 1M 11 12
13 1413 1413 1413 1413 14
13 1413 14 13 14
D D
15 1615 1615 1615 1615 16
15 1615 16
1A 2A15 16
L+ ML+ ML+ ML+ ML+ M

L+ ML+ 3A
M 4AL+ M
2L+2M 2L+ 2M
L1
T1 T1 T1
T2
L2 T2 T2 T2
L3
T3 T3 T3
T3
PE
+24V
T1
PE
1 3 5
2 4 6
11
10
12
13
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
-Y4
-X8
1
1
2
10
11
10
12
13
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
-X2
-X5
-X7
-X3
2 4 6
10
12
13
11
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
1
1 3 5
E E
-Z5
-Z8
-Z24
-Z10
-Z12
-Z14
-Z11
-Z22
-Z6
-Z13
-Z7
-Z23
-Z9
-XC2
-XC1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C1
CABINET COMPONENTS 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+Bridge Control Panel
Bridge Control Panel - mounted on wheelhouse console

A Console cut-out details:
Side View
A
10mm from each panel edge
10 25mm from each corner 8
Countersunk mounting holes Ø5 Aluminum plate
3mm thick
10
14.5
10
10
-Pl1 External Fire Fighting System 4xØ5 Recommended Cut-out 145mm

10 mounting screw:
10
DIN 7991
10
DIN EN ISO 10462
ISO 10642
-A1 5 UNI 5933
25
Cut-out limit Vessel console
B B
10
Siemens plug at underside

6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
10.1"
Beijer X2 10.1" Front Left
194
16
12.8
280
300
C C
54.4
53.4
15.1
56.5
11.7
13.7
EMERGENCY STOP SYSTEM OPERATION BUZZER 6.7 50
STAND BY ON
Top 8.8
D D
pushbutton
Mushroom
50
35
-S1 -S4 -H7
www.fifisystems.com
10
300
Supplied with 1.0m wire 3
from panel to terminals
Vessel console
Aluminum plate
3mm thick
10mm
Cut-out limit
Screen: Beijer 10.1"
Size: 300x300mm
Material: 3mm Aluminium with Black Foil Laminate
Text: White
Logo: Colored
E E
-Y1
10
PE
-X22
-Z3
-Z2
-Z1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C1
BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
6 4xØ4
Portable Panel
6
-Pl1 DOWN Fire Fighting DOWN
L
R System L R
I I
E E
G G
F F
H H
T T
T T
-S2 UP
-S6 UP
B B
97
220
FOG JET FOG JET
-S3 -S7
www.fifisystems.com
152
Size: 152x97mm
Material: Black Trafolyte
85
Text: White
Logo: Colored
C C
105
Wall Bracket for Panel
D D
160
Colour: Yellow - RAL1021

E Material: Polyamide E
Ingress Protection: IP 65
Supplied with wall Bracket
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C1
PORTABLE PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
18-pin socket/plug Socket housing cover Socket housing Plug housing
B B
C C
46
17,5
M25
76
17,5
72
D 57 D
27
34
113
76
63,5
PANEL CUTOUT
73,5
37,1
32,5
22,3
E E
58
37,5
67,1
83,1
1,2
46
58
+Portable
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C1
PLUG PORTABLE PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
E
A
00
Rev.
Modifications
1
1
1 -1M1:L1
SUPPLY: 380-415 3AC 50Hz 10A C2/9.B3
-W1
SUPPLY: 440-480 3AC 60Hz 10A 2 -1M1:L2
C2/9.B3
Date
3 x 1.5mm + E
3 -1M1:L3
C2/9.B3
2
2
15.03.2023
CV
Name
SUPPLY: 110-120V 1AC 16A for 110V Valves 1
C3/1.B3
-X1 1
SUPPLY: 220-230V 1AC 16A for 220V Valves -W2
GJ
Apr.
2 x 2.5mm + E
2
C3/1.B3
2
YARD SUPPLY
TO FI-FI SYSTEM
3
3
1
C3/2.E1
-X2 1
-W3
SUPPLY: 24VDC 10A +24 VDC
2 x 2.5mm + E
2
C3/2.E1
2
0 VDC
-X3
4
4
1
C3/2.E1
1
-W4 +24 VDC

Back-Up/emergency SUPPLY: 24VDC 10A
2 x 2.5mm + E
2
C3/2.E2
2
0 VDC
5
5
6
6
SUPPLY FROM SHIP
7
7
Fi-Fi WIRING DIAGRAM
Document type
Drawing number
7604034
8
8
Next
2
Sheet 1
C2
F
E
A
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE 1:
-A2 ALL CABLING SHOWN ARE TO BE
A A
SUPPLIED BY YARD
C3/2.D8
Cable cross-sections must be
Modbus TCP
verified/corrected by yard to
ETHERNET PROFINET PROFINET PROFINET PROFINET comply with local rules and safety
-A2 -U1 -U1 -U1 -U2
-X7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
C3/2.D8 C3/2.E3 C2/2.B4 C2/2.B4 standards before installation.
LAN_A P1 X1P1R X1P2R X1P1R
Note 2:
10
B B
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
1
-P1
-P2
-P3
-P4
Profinet Cable must NOT
be place together with
+Ship IF cables for 380-480VAC
Ethernet : 192.168.20.22
Port: 502
MINIMUM 30CM APART
ID: 1
NOTE 3:
ONLY APPROVED CABLE
C FOR PROFINET TO BE USED. C
-W5
-W6
10 x 1.5mm + E
2x2x0,34mm
PREFERRED TYPE: SIEMENS
Industrial Ethernet FC TP Marine Cable
6XV1840-4AH10
D D
-P2
10
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
1
LAN_A
-X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 C3/4.E1
-A1
ETHERNET
E E
-A1
C3/4.E1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
2MSF-1G-2V-2Beijer10-MOD-BV Fi-Fi WIRING DIAGRAM Drawing number Sheet 2
WIRING TO BRIDGE PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C3/1.E3
C3/1.E4
C3/1.E4
C3/1.E4
C3/1.E4
C3/1.E4
C3/1.E5
C3/1.E5
A A
-X10 1 2 3 4 -X10 5 6 7 8
4
3
3
1
1
B -W10 B
-W11
4 x 1.5mm + E
4 x 1.5mm + E
C C
D D
2
4
3
3
1
11 12 5 13 11 12 5 13
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
COM
COM
HEATER HEATER
M 5W M 5W
Motor 1-Phase i-Tork

Motor 1-Phase i-Tork
E -V1 -V2 E
C2/4.E2 C2/4.E3
Suction Valve 1 Discharge Valve 1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
VALVES 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Suction
Valve 1
Suction
Valve 1
Discharge
Valve 1
Discharge
Valve 1
A
Open Closed Open Closed
I 12.4 I 12.5 I 12.6 I 12.7
-1A5 -1A5 -1A5 -1A5

C3/6.A4 C3/6.B4 C3/6.B4 C3/6.B4
5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
2
4
3
3
1
1
B B
-W21
-W20
4 x 1.5mm + E
4 x 1.5mm + E
C C
D D
2
4
3
3
1
17 18 15 16 17 18 15 16
NO
NO
NO
NO
C
AOLS ACLS AOLS ACLS

E OPENED CLOSED
i-Tork
OPENED CLOSED
i-Tork
E
-V1 -V2
C2/3.E2 C2/3.E3
Suction Valve 1 Discharge Valve 1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
FEEDBACK VALVES 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C2/9.D3
C2/9.D3
C2/9.D3
C2/9.D4
C2/9.D4
C2/9.D4
C3/2.D5
C3/2.D5
A M1 limit
switch Up
M1 limit
switch
M1 limit
switch Left
M1 limit
switch
A
Down Right
-1M1:T1
-1M2:T1
-1M1:T2
-1M1:T3
-1M2:T2
-1M2:T3
I 12.0 I 12.1 I 12.2 I 12.3
-1A5 -1A5 -1A5 -1A5

-X5 1 3 C3/6.A4 C3/6.A4 C3/6.A4 C3/6.A4
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
10
2
4
3
5
6
9
1
B B
-W30
6 x 1.5mm + E
-W31
10 x 1.5mm + E
2
4
3
5
6
1
1L1
2L1
1L2
1L3
2L2
2L3
-Q1
Safety and maintenance
2T1
2T2
2T3
1T1
1T2
1T3
switch mounted by
2
4
3
5
6
1
monitor
-W30.1
C 6 x 1.5mm + E C
10
2
4
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
9
1
-M1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Brown
Black
Brown
Grey
Black
Grey
4
3
1
4
3
1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
M M 1 2 4 5
D D
-M1 -M2 1 2 4 5
Up/Down Left/Right
White
Black
Up Left
Down Right
E -M3 M E
24 VDC
=
Lower endstop
Upper endstop
Outer endstop
Inner endstop
Fog/Jet
FIRE MONITOR FFS

F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
MONITOR 1 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C2/9.D5
C2/9.D5
C2/9.D5
C2/9.D6
C2/9.D6
C2/9.D6
C3/2.D6
C3/2.D6
A M2 limit
switch Up
M2 limit
switch
M2 limit
switch Left
M2 limit
switch
A
Down Right
-2M1:T1
-2M2:T1
-2M1:T2
-2M1:T3
-2M2:T2
-2M2:T3
I 13.0 I 13.1 I 13.2 I 13.3
-1A6 -1A6 -1A6 -1A6

-X5 2 4 C3/6.B4 C3/6.B4 C3/6.B4 C3/6.B4
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
10
2
4
3
5
6
9
1
B B
-W32
6 x 1.5mm + E
-W33
10 x 1.5mm + E
2
4
3
5
6
1
1L1
2L1
1L2
1L3
2L2
2L3
-Q2
Safety and maintenance
2T1
2T2
2T3
1T1
1T2
1T3
switch mounted by
2
4
3
5
6
1
monitor
-W32.1
C 6 x 1.5mm + E C
10
2
4
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
9
1
-M2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Brown
Black
Brown
Grey
Black
Grey
4
3
1
4
3
1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
M M 1 2 4 5
D D
-M1 -M2 1 2 4 5
Up/Down Left/Right
White
Black
Up Left
Down Right
E -M3 M E
24 VDC
=
Lower endstop
Upper endstop
Outer endstop
Inner endstop
Fog/Jet
FIRE MONITOR FFS

F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
MONITOR 2 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C3/3.D1
C3/4.B6
A Low Lub
Press Gear
High Oil
Temp Gear
Low Clutch
Press Gear
A
1 1 1
I 14.4 I 14.5 I 14.6
-1A7 -1A7 -1A7

-X5 5 6 C3/6.C4 C3/6.C4 C3/6.C4
5 13 6 14 7 15
+24V
+24V
+24V
2
4
3
8
1
B B
-W40
8 x 1.5mm + E
C C
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
1
D D
-XPC1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Brown
Blue
White
White
White
A1
Red
Red
Red
-K1
A2
E C E
P
Low Clutch
Pressure
Solenoid
Low Lub
Pressure
High Oil
Temp
Valve
FFS XP (C) Pump/Clutch Unit

F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
CLUTCH 1 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Common
Alarm 1
Request for
Fi-Fi Syst 1
Engaged
Clutch 1A
Engaged
Clutch 1B
Ready for
Fi-Fi
80% Load
M.Engine 1
100% Load
M.Engine 1
Stopped M.
Engine 1
A
System 1
Q 12.0 Q 12.1 Q 12.2 Q 12.3 I 14.0 I 14.1 I 14.2 I 14.3
-1A8 -1A8 -1A8 -1A8 -1A7 -1A7 -1A7 -1A7

C3/6.D4 C3/6.D4 C3/6.D4 C3/6.D4 C3/6.C4 C3/6.C4 C3/6.C4 C3/6.C4
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
-W50:SH1
-W50:SH2
-W50:SH3
-W50:SH4
-W50:SH5
-W50:SH6
-W50:SH7
-W50:SH8
2
2
1
1
B B
C C
100% Load Main Engine 1, "1" = OK, "0" = Clutch Out

80% Load Main Engine 1 , "1" = OK, "0" = Alarm
Ready for Fi-Fi System 1, "1" = Ready for FI-FI
Request for Fi-Fi, System 1, "1" = Request
Stopped Main Engine 1, "1" = Stopped

Clutch 1B Engaged, "1" = Engaged
Clutch 1A Engaged, "1" = Engaged
Common Alarm, "1" = OK
D D
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
E E
Relay Output Signals Relay input Signals
to Ship Interface from Ship Interface
control voltage:
24-120 VDC / 5A 24 VDC is Supplied
24-230 VAC / 5A from FI-FI system
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
SHIP INTERFACE 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
C2/1.A2
C2/1.A2
C2/1.A2
+Ship IF-440-480V
+Ship IF-440-480V
+Ship IF-440-480V
B B
L1 L2 L3
-1M1 Motor -1M2 Motor -2M1 Motor -2M2 Motor
Starter Starter Starter Starter
0.3-1A 0.3-1A 0.3-1A 0.3-1A
C C
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
C2/5.A1
C2/5.A1
C2/5.A1
C2/5.A1
C2/5.A1
C2/5.A1
C2/6.A1
C2/6.A1
C2/6.A1
C2/6.A1
C2/6.A1
C2/6.A1
D D
FIRE MONITOR 1 FIRE MONITOR 2
MONITOR SIZES 400-480V Up/Down Left/Right Up/Down Left/Right
Ampere: 0,3-1A(0,55A) 0,3-1A(0,55A) 0,3-1A(0,55A) 0,3-1A(0,55A)

MONITOR 300/600:
Name: 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0
Ampere: 0,3-1A(0,7A) 0,3-1A(0,7A) 0,3-1A(0,7A) 0,3-1A(0,7A)
MONITOR 1200:
3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0 3RK1308-0BB00-0CP0
E Name: E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C2
POWER DISTRIBUTION 400VAC 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
-X1:1
C2/1.A2
-X1:2
C2/1.A3
B B
1 3
10A
-F10
C3/3.C1 2 4
C C
1 R3 3 1 R3 3
D -K10:1 -K10:2 D
C3/3.D5 2 R4 4 C3/3.D6 2 R4 4
-X10:1
-X10:2
-X10:3
-X10:4
-X10:5
-X10:6
-X10:7
-X10:8
C2/3.A2
C2/3.A2
C2/3.A2
C2/3.A2
C2/3.A3
C2/3.A3
C2/3.A3
C2/3.A3
E E
Supply to Suction and Discharge Valves 1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C3
2MSF-1G-2V-2Beijer10-MOD-BV Fi-Fi CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Drawing number Sheet 1
PWR. DISTRIBUTION 110/220VAC 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A A
~
-V1
- +
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
~ 6A 2A 2A 2A 2A
-F1 -F3 -F4 -F8 -F9
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
C3/3.E1 C3/3.D1 C3/3.D1 C3/3.C1
~ ~
-V2 -V3
- + + -
~ ~
B B
A1+ A1+
-K7 -K8
A2- A2- 1 R3 3 1 R3 3 1 R3 3 1 R3 3
-X2:1 -Br1 -X2:1 -Br2
3 3
1 1 -K3:1 -K3:2 -K4:1 -K4:2
4
C3/3.D3 2 R4 4 C3/3.D4 2 R4 4 C3/3.D4 2 R4 4 C3/3.D5 2 R4 4
1 3 1 3
10A 10A
C -F0 -F0B C
2 4 2 4
-K3:1:A2
-X8:13
-X7:3
-X7:4
C3/5.A8
Bridge Panel C3/4.C2
Bridge Panel C3/4.C2
C3/3.A3
-X5:1
-X7:1
-X5:3
-X5:2
-X5:4
-X7:2
+ -
C2/2.A2
C3/4.C1
C3/4.C1
C2/5.A2
C2/5.A2
C2/6.A2
C2/6.A2
Terminal to
Terminal to
-A2
D Touch Panel D
Monitor 1 Actuator Monitor 2 Actuator Supply 24V to Supply 24V to

Bridge Cabinet
Touch Panel Touch Panel
-X2:1
-X3:1
-X2:2
-X3:2
E CPU CP 1542SP-1
E
1510SP ET200SP
C2/1.A3
C2/1.A4
C2/1.A4
C2/1.A4
2L+
2L+
1L+
1L+
2M
2M
1M
1M
-U1 -U2
L+ M +24V M
C3/6.A1 C2/9.C3
SUPPLY: VOLTAGE BACK-UP/EMERGENCY
-1A1 -1M1
24VDC 10A SUPPLY: 24VDC 10A
Simatic Interface Communications
Module Processor
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C3
PWR. DISTRIBUTION 24VDC 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Tripped Clutch 1 IN Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Jet Monitor 2 Monitor 2 Jet Suction Discharge
A
C3/2.C4
fuses in Fog Fog Valve 1 Valve 1
cabinet
I 11.7 Q 11.1 Q 11.2 Q 11.3 Q 10.5 Q 10.6 Q 10.0 Q 10.1
-X2:1:4
-1A4 -1A2 -1A2 -1A2 -1A1 -1A1 -1A1 -1A1
C3/6.D2 C3/6.B2 C3/6.B2 C3/6.B2 C3/6.B2 C3/6.B2 C3/6.A2 C3/6.A2
8 16 2 10 3 11 4 12 6 14 7 15 1 9 2 10
+24V
B B
13
C -F10 C
C3/1.B3
14
14
-F9
C3/2.B8
13
13
-F8
C3/2.B7
14
D C3/2.B6
14 D
-F4
13
-X7:9
-X5:6
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
13
-K3:1 -K3:2 -K4:1 -K4:2 -K10:1 -K10:2
C3/4.B6
C2/7.A2
-F3 C3/2.C5 C3/2.C5 C3/2.C6 C3/2.C6 C3/1.D3 C3/1.D4

C3/2.B5 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
14
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C3
CONTROL VOLTAGE 24VDC 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A Emergency
Stop Pump
Enable
Stand-by/on
Buzzer
A
1
I 10.6 I 10.7 Q 10.7
-1A3 -1A3 -1A1

C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.B2
7 15 8 16 8 16
+24V
+24V
-X5:5
B C2/7.A2 B
C3/2.C3
C3/2.C4
-1A2:2
C3/2.D7
C3/2.D7
C3/3.D1
+24VDC
+24VDC
0VDC
0VDC
-X2:1:1
-X2:1:3
-F8:2
-F8:4
-X7 1 2 -X7 3 4 5 6 7 8 -X7 9 10

C C
-X22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PE
-X22 9 10 -X22
-X22
GNYE
10
2
4
3
9
1
D D
C3/4.E3
1 3 X1 1
-S1 -S4 -H7 -S1
C3/4.D7
2 4 X2 2
-A1 PE
C3/4.E1
E + -
Emergency Stop Pump 1
E
C2/2.E4
-A1
Touch Panel
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C3
INTERFACE BRIDGE PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 2 Monitor 2 Monitor 2 Monitor 2 Monitor 2
C3/2.C2
Up Down Left Right Fog Jet Up Down Left Right Fog Jet
A A
I 10.0 I 10.1 I 10.2 I 10.3 I 10.4 I 10.5 I 11.0 I 11.1 I 11.2 I 11.3 I 11.4 I 11.5
-X2:1:1
-1A3 -1A3 -1A3 -1A3 -1A3 -1A3 -1A4 -1A4 -1A4 -1A4 -1A4 -1A4
C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.C2 C3/6.D2 C3/6.D2 C3/6.D2 C3/6.D2 C3/6.D2
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
10
12
13
11
-X8
2
4
3
9
1
B B
10
12
13
11
2
4
3
9
1
-W52
13 x 1.5mm + E
+Portable
C C
Portable Panel supplied
with 15m Cable and
Plug J3 by FFS
10
12
13
11
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
-Plug J3/P3
1
10/18
12/18
13/18
14/18
15/18
16/18
11/18
2/18
4/18
3/18
5/18
6/18
7/18
8/18
9/18
1/18
1/18
2/18
3/18
4/18
5/18
6/18
7/18
8/18
9/18
10/18
11/18
12/18
13/18
14/18
15/18
16/18
10
12
13
14
15
16
11
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
1
D Joystick for Monitor Joystick for Monitor
D
18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
Switch for Fog/Jet Switch for Fog/Jet
10
12
15
16
11
2
4
3
9
1
13
14
U U
4 4 4 4 4/I 4/II 4 4 4 4 4/I 4/II
L R -S3 L R -S7
0 0
-S2 3 3 3 3 3/I 3/II -S6 3 3 3 3 3/I 3/II
D D
E E
Monitor 1 Down
Monitor 2 Down
Monitor 1 Right
Monitor 2 Right
Monitor 1 Fog
Monitor 2 Fog
Monitor 1 Left
Monitor 2 Left
Monitor 1 Jet
Monitor 2 Jet
Monitor 2 Up
Monitor 1 Up
Spare
Spare
Spare
+24V
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C3
INTERFACE PORTABLE PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-1A1 -1A5
6ES7132-6BF01-0BA0 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0
A Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref. Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref. A
Q 10.0 Suction Valve 1 1,9 C3/3.A5 I 12.0 M1 limit switch Up 1,9 C2/5.A2
Q 10.1 Discharge Valve 1 2,10 C3/3.A6 I 12.1 M1 limit switch Down 2,10 C2/5.A3
Q 10.2 Q 10.2 3,11 I 12.2 M1 limit switch Left 3,11 C2/5.A3
Q 10.3 Q 10.3 4,12 I 12.3 M1 limit switch Right 4,12 C2/5.A4
Q 10.4 Q 11.4 5,13 I 12.4 Suction Valve 1 Open 5,13 C2/4.A2
Q 10.5 Monitor 2 Fog 6,14 C3/3.A5 I 12.5 Suction Valve 1 Closed 6,14 C2/4.A2
Q 10.6 Monitor 2 Jet 7,15 C3/3.A5 I 12.6 Discharge Valve 1 Open 7,15 C2/4.A3
Q 10.7 Buzzer 8,16 C3/4.A4 I 12.7 Discharge Valve 1 Closed 8,16 C2/4.A4
-1A2 -1A6
6ES7 132-6BD20-0BA0 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0
Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref. Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref.
B Q 11.0 Q 11.0 1,9 I 13.0 M2 limit switch Up 1,9 C2/6.A2 B
Q 11.1 Clutch 1 IN 2,10 C3/3.A1 I 13.1 M2 limit switch Down 2,10 C2/6.A3
Q 11.2 Monitor 1 Fog 3,11 C3/3.A4 I 13.2 M2 limit switch Left 3,11 C2/6.A3
Q 11.3 Monitor 1 Jet 4,12 C3/3.A4 I 13.3 M2 limit switch Right 4,12 C2/6.A4
-1A3 I 13.4 I 13.4 5,13
6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 I 13.5 I 13.5 6,14
Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref. I 13.6 I 13.6 7,15
I 10.0 Monitor 1 Up 1,9 C3/5.A1 I 13.7 I 13.7 8,16
I 10.1 Monitor 1 Down 2,10 C3/5.A1 -1A7
I 10.2 Monitor 1 Left 3,11 C3/5.A2 6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0
I 10.3 Monitor 1 Right 4,12 C3/5.A2 Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref.
I 10.4 Monitor 1 Fog 5,13 C3/5.A3 I 14.0 Ready for Fi-Fi System 1 1,9 C2/8.A3
C I 10.5 Monitor 1 Jet 6,14 C3/5.A3 I 14.1 80% Load M.Engine 1 2,10 C2/8.A3 C
I 10.6 Emergency Stop Pump 1 7,15 C3/4.A3 I 14.2 100% Load M.Engine 1 3,11 C2/8.A4
I 10.7 Enable Stand-by/on 8,16 C3/4.A3 I 14.3 Stopped M.Engine 1 4,12 C2/8.A4
-1A4 I 14.4 Low Lub Press Gear 1 5,13 C2/7.A2
6ES7131-6BF01-0BA0 I 14.5 High Oil Temp Gear 1 6,14 C2/7.A3
Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref. I 14.6 Low Clutch Press Gear 1 7,15 C2/7.A3
I 11.0 Monitor 2 Up 1,9 C3/5.A5 I 14.7 I 14.7 8,16
I 11.1 Monitor 2 Down 2,10 C3/5.A5 -1A8
I 11.2 Monitor 2 Left 3,11 C3/5.A6 6ES7132-6HD01-0BB1
I 11.3 Monitor 2 Right 4,12 C3/5.A6 Phys. Adr. Symb. Adr. Pins Schema Ref.
I 11.4 Monitor 2 Fog 5,13 C3/5.A7 Q 12.0 Common Alarm 1 1,5 C2/8.A1
I 11.5 Monitor 2 Jet 6,14 C3/5.A7 Q 12.1 Request for Fi-Fi Syst 1 2,6 C2/8.A2
I 11.6 I 11.6 7,15 Q 12.2 Engaged Clutch 1A 3,7 C2/8.A2
D I 11.7 Tripped fuses in cabinet 8,16 C3/3.A1 Q 12.3 Engaged Clutch 1B 4,8 C2/8.A2 D
-BU-Cover
6ES7133-6CV15-1AM0
BU Cover
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
C3
OVERVIEW PLC CARD 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fuse Description Function
-1M1 Simatic ET 200SP, Motor Starter, reverse, 0.25 KW / 400 V,0.3A...1A Monitor 1 Up/Down (Setting: 0,55/0,70A)
-1M2 Simatic ET 200SP, Motor Starter, reverse, 0.25 KW / 400 V,0.3A...1A Monitor 1 Left/Right (Setting: 0,55/0,70A)
A -2M1 Simatic ET 200SP, Motor Starter, reverse, 0.25 KW / 400 V,0.3A...1A Monitor 2 Up/Down (Setting: 0,55/0,70A) A
-2M2 Simatic ET 200SP, Motor Starter, reverse, 0.25 KW / 400 V,0.3A...1A Monitor 2 Left/Right (Setting: 0,55/0,70A)
-F0 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 10A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Supply Main 24V
-F0B Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 10A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Supply Backup 24V
-F1 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 6A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Main Supply 24V to PLC
-F3 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 2A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Monitor 1 Actuator
-F4 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 2A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Monitor 2 Actuator
-F8 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 2A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Supply 24V to Bridge Touch Panel
-F9 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 2A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Supply 24V to Cabinet Touch Panel
-F10 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 10A, C-type, 15kA, 400V Supply to Suction and Discharge Valves 1
B B
C C
D D
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
FUSE LIST
MAIN CONTROL CABINET 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Wire No. From Location From Device:Pin To Location To Device:Pin Color Cross-section Length [mm] Wire Type
81 +Bridge Control Panel -S1:2 +Bridge Control Panel -S4:4 RED 0.75 mm² 100 Radox 125 RD
1 +Bridge Control Panel -X22:1 +Bridge Control Panel -A1:+ BLACK 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
2 +Bridge Control Panel -X22:2 +Bridge Control Panel -A1:- BLACK 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
A 3 +Bridge Control Panel -X22:3 +Bridge Control Panel -S1:2 BLACK 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H A
4 +Bridge Control Panel -X22:4 +Bridge Control Panel -H7:X2 BLACK 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
5 +Bridge Control Panel -X22:5 +Bridge Control Panel -S1:1 BLACK 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
7 +Bridge Control Panel -X22:7 +Bridge Control Panel -H7:X1 BLACK 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
GNYE +Bridge Control Panel -X22:PE +Bridge Control Panel -A1:PE GREEN-YELLOW 0.75 mm² 1300 12G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
63 +Main Control Cabinet -1A1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:1:A1 RED 0.75 mm² 1008,4 Radox 125 RD
B 62
67
-1A1:7
-1A1:8
-K4:2:A1
-X7:7
RED
RED
0.75 mm²
0.75 mm²
949,5
293,8
Radox 125 RD
Radox 125 RD
B
53 +Main Control Cabinet -1A2:2 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:9 RED 0.75 mm² 312 Radox 125 RD
35 +Main Control Cabinet -1A2:10 +Main Control Cabinet -X5:6 WHITE 0.75 mm² 346,1 Radox 125 WH
69 +Main Control Cabinet -1A3:1 +Main Control Cabinet -X8:1 RED 0.75 mm² 304,1 Radox 125 RD
C 66 +Main Control Cabinet -1A3:8 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:6 RED 0.75 mm² 328,9 Radox 125 RD C
100 +Main Control Cabinet -A2:- +Main Control Cabinet -F9:4 WHITE 0.75 mm² 866,3 Radox 125 WH
101 +Main Control Cabinet -A2:+ +Main Control Cabinet -F9:2 RED 0.75 mm² 880,1 Radox 125 RD
103 +Main Control Cabinet -A2:PE +Main Control Cabinet -E10 GREEN-YELLOW 2.50 mm² 1631,5 Radox 125 GNYE
114 +Main Control Cabinet -F0B:1 +Main Control Cabinet -K8:A1+ RED 2.50 mm² 628,8 Radox 125 RD
15 +Main Control Cabinet -F1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -V1:+ RED 2.50 mm² 296,5 Radox 125 RD
D 41
19
-F1:2
-F1:3
-X2:1:1
-V3:-
RED
WHITE
0.75 mm²
2.50 mm²
633,8
557,4
Radox 125 RD
Radox 125 WH
D
16 +Main Control Cabinet -F3:1 +Main Control Cabinet -F1:1 RED 2.50 mm² 201,7 Radox 125 RD
20 +Main Control Cabinet -F3:3 +Main Control Cabinet -F1:3 WHITE 2.50 mm² 201,4 Radox 125 WH
94 +Main Control Cabinet -F3:4 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:3 WHITE 0.75 mm² 389,3 Radox 125 WH
54 +Main Control Cabinet -F3:14 +Main Control Cabinet -1A4:8 RED 0.75 mm² 1060,5 Radox 125 RD
97 +Main Control Cabinet -F8:2 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:1 RED 0.75 mm² 935,2 Radox 125 RD
96 +Main Control Cabinet -F8:4 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:2 WHITE 0.75 mm² 958,1 Radox 125 WH
E 57 +Main Control Cabinet -F8:13 +Main Control Cabinet -F9:13 RED 0.75 mm² 220,8 Radox 125 RD E
3 +Main Control Cabinet -F10:2 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:1:1 BLACK 1.50 mm² 393,2 Radox 125 BK
102 +Main Control Cabinet -F10:13 +Main Control Cabinet -1A4:16 RED 0.75 mm² 1395,4 Radox 125 RD
92 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -F3:2 RED 0.75 mm² 397,5 Radox 125 RD
47 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:2:1 RED 0.75 mm² 249,5 Radox 125 RD
30 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:2 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:2:4 WHITE 0.75 mm² 272,3 Radox 125 WH
49 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:2 +Main Control Cabinet -X5:1 RED 0.75 mm² 457,2 Radox 125 RD
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
WIRING LIST 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
31 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:4 +Main Control Cabinet -X5:3 WHITE 0.75 mm² 487,3 Radox 125 WH
36 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:A2 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:2:A2 WHITE 0.75 mm² 247,4 Radox 125 WH
A 37 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:2:A2 +Main Control Cabinet -K4:1:A2 WHITE 0.75 mm² 247,4 Radox 125 WH A
93 +Main Control Cabinet -K4:1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -F4:2 RED 0.75 mm² 350,9 Radox 125 RD
52 +Main Control Cabinet -K4:1:2 +Main Control Cabinet -X5:2 RED 0.75 mm² 575 Radox 125 RD
95 +Main Control Cabinet -K4:1:3 +Main Control Cabinet -F4:4 WHITE 0.75 mm² 342,8 Radox 125 WH
34 +Main Control Cabinet -K4:1:4 +Main Control Cabinet -X5:4 WHITE 0.75 mm² 605,1 Radox 125 WH
B 112
113
-K7:A1+
-K7:A2-
-F0:1
-F0:3
RED
WHITE
2.50 mm²
2.50 mm²
586
618,9
Radox 125 RD
Radox 125 WH
B
115 +Main Control Cabinet -K8:A2- +Main Control Cabinet -F0B:3 WHITE 2.50 mm² 661,6 Radox 125 WH
4 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:1:R3 BLACK 1.50 mm² 220,8 Radox 125 BK
Blue +Main Control Cabinet -P1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -P2:1 BLUE 1300 6XV1840-4AH10
Orange +Main Control Cabinet -P1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -P2:1 ORANGE 1300 6XV1840-4AH10
Yellow +Main Control Cabinet -P1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -P2:1 YELLOW 1300 6XV1840-4AH10
White +Main Control Cabinet -P2:1 +Main Control Cabinet -P1:1 WHITE 1300 6XV1840-4AH10
24 +Main Control Cabinet -U1:1M +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:3 WHITE 0.75 mm² 684,6 Radox 125 WH
28 +Main Control Cabinet -U1:2M +Main Control Cabinet -U2:2L+ WHITE 0.75 mm² 290,8 Radox 125 WH
C 46 +Main Control Cabinet -U2:1L+ +Main Control Cabinet -U1:2L+ RED 0.75 mm² 308,8 Radox 125 RD C
98 +Main Control Cabinet -U2:1M +Main Control Cabinet -1A1:L+ RED 0.75 mm² 272,8 Radox 125 RD
99 +Main Control Cabinet -U2:2M +Main Control Cabinet -1A1:M WHITE 0.75 mm² 263,2 Radox 125 WH
106 +Main Control Cabinet -V1:~ +Main Control Cabinet -F0:1 RED 2.50 mm² 204,6 Radox 125 RD
104 +Main Control Cabinet -V1:~ +Main Control Cabinet -V1:~ RED 2.50 mm² 111,8 Radox 125 RD
105 +Main Control Cabinet -V1:+ +Main Control Cabinet -V2:+ RED 2.50 mm² 227,3 Radox 125 RD
108 +Main Control Cabinet -V2:~ +Main Control Cabinet -F0B:1 RED 2.50 mm² 356,8 Radox 125 RD
107 +Main Control Cabinet -V2:~ +Main Control Cabinet -V2:~ RED 2.50 mm² 102,4 Radox 125 RD
109 +Main Control Cabinet -V3:- +Main Control Cabinet -F0:3 WHITE 2.50 mm² 486,9 Radox 125 WH
111 +Main Control Cabinet -V3:~ +Main Control Cabinet -F0B:3 WHITE 2.50 mm² 502,1 Radox 125 WH
110 +Main Control Cabinet -V3:~ +Main Control Cabinet -V3:~ WHITE 2.50 mm² 113,3 Radox 125 WH
1 +Main Control Cabinet -X1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -F10:1 BLACK 2.50 mm² 624,3 Radox 125 BK
D 2
116
-X1:2
-X2:1
-F10:3
-F0:2
BLACK
RED
2.50 mm²
2.50 mm²
606,7
679,8
Radox 125 BK
Radox 125 RD
D
118 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:2 +Main Control Cabinet -F0:4 WHITE 2.50 mm² 704,7 Radox 125 WH
42 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -X8:13 RED 0.75 mm² 831,4 Radox 125 RD
43 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:1 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:3 RED 0.75 mm² 711,8 Radox 125 RD
45 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:2 +Main Control Cabinet -1M1:+24V RED 0.75 mm² 945,7 Radox 125 RD
44 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:2 +Main Control Cabinet -U1:1L+ RED 0.75 mm² 658,6 Radox 125 RD
23 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:3 +Main Control Cabinet -F1:4 WHITE 0.75 mm² 663,5 Radox 125 WH
25 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:3 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:4 WHITE 0.75 mm² 729 Radox 125 WH
26 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:4 +Main Control Cabinet -1M1:M WHITE 0.75 mm² 946,2 Radox 125 WH
27 +Main Control Cabinet -X2:1:4 +Main Control Cabinet -K3:1:A2 WHITE 0.75 mm² 490,4 Radox 125 WH
117 +Main Control Cabinet -X3:1 +Main Control Cabinet -F0B:2 RED 2.50 mm² 734,3 Radox 125 RD
119 +Main Control Cabinet -X3:2 +Main Control Cabinet -F0B:4 WHITE 2.50 mm² 759,2 Radox 125 WH
E 68 +Main Control Cabinet -X7:10 +Main Control Cabinet -X5:5 RED 0.75 mm² 221,3 Radox 125 RD E
7 +Main Control Cabinet -X10:1 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:1:2 BLACK 1.50 mm² 478,9 Radox 125 BK
8 +Main Control Cabinet -X10:2 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:1:R4 BLACK 1.50 mm² 467 Radox 125 BK
11 +Main Control Cabinet -X10:5 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:2:2 BLACK 1.50 mm² 454,2 Radox 125 BK
12 +Main Control Cabinet -X10:6 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:2:R4 BLACK 1.50 mm² 442,3 Radox 125 BK
14 +Main Control Cabinet -X10:8 +Main Control Cabinet -K10:2:R3 BLACK 1.50 mm² 623,5 Radox 125 BK
91 +Main Control Cabinet -XC2 +Main Control Cabinet -XC1 GREEN-YELLOW 2.50 mm² 187 Radox 125 GNYE
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
WIRING LIST 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 +Portable -J3:1 +Portable -S2:4 BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
A 4 +Portable -J3:4 +Portable -S2:4 BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H A
5 +Portable -J3:5 +Portable -S3:4/I BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
6 +Portable -J3:6 +Portable -S3:4/II BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
7 +Portable -J3:7 :{0} BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
8 +Portable -J3:8 :{0} BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
13 +Portable -J3:13 +Portable -S7:4/I BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
14 +Portable -J3:14 +Portable -S7:4/II BLACK 0.75 mm² 15000 18G0.75 Ölflex Classic 130H
B 15
16
+Portable
+Portable
-J3:15
-J3:16 +Portable
:{0}
-S7:3/II
BLACK
BLACK
0.75 mm²
0.75 mm²
15000
15000
B
84 +Portable -S2:3 +Portable -S2:3 RED 0.75 mm² 40 Radox 125 RD
85 +Portable -S3:3/II +Portable -S2:3 RED 0.75 mm² 40 Radox 125 RD
86 +Portable -S3:3/II +Portable -S6:3 RED 0.75 mm² 40 Radox 125 RD
90 +Portable -S6:3 +Portable -S7:3/II RED 0.75 mm² 40 Radox 125 RD
C C
D D
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
WIRING LIST 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bridge Control Panel
No AX Number QTY Device Name Description Placement
1 7001015 1 -A1 10.1" touch panel, X2 C3/4.E1
2 5000008 1 -A1 Ring Cable Shoe S0822022 - M4 C3/4.E1
A 3 7000516 1 -H7 Acoustic signal device, compact, 22 mm C3/4.D4 A
4 7000485 1 -P2 Connector IE FC RJ45 PLUG 180 2x2 C2/2.D4
5 7000990-009 1 -Pl1 Plate for 10" X2 Panel C1/4.D1
6 7000918 1 -S1 Mushroom pushbutton, Pull-to-unlatch, Red, 22mm, metal, shiny C3/4.D6
7 7000501 2 -S1 Contact module with 1 NC C3/4.D6
8 7000917 1 -S1 Holder, 3 modules, 22mm switch, Metal C3/4.D6
9 7000037 1 -S1 E-Stop Protective Shroud C1/4.D1
10 7000921 1 -S4 Latching, 2 pos. selector switch, Black, 22mm, metal, shiny C3/4.D3
11 7000502 1 -S4 Contact module with 1 NO C3/4.D3
12 7000917 1 -S4 Holder, 3 modules, 22mm switch, Metal C3/4.D3
13 7000143 10 -X22 2-conductor through terminal block C3/4.D1
B 14
15
7000199
7000144
1
1
-X22
-Z1
Terminal Block Ground
End and intermediate plate, 0.8mm, grey
C3/4.D8
C1/4.F6
B
16 7000004 1 -Z2 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/4.F6
17 7000004 1 -Z3 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/4.F5
C C
D D
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
REFERENCE LIST
BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 7000227 1 -1A1 Baseunit BU15-P16+A0+2D Terminal module, New loadgroup C3/3.B5
2 7000234 1 -1A1 Simatic ET 200SP 8 x DO 24VDC; 0,5A C3/6.A1
A 3 7000588 1 -1A1 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/6.A1 A
4 7000102 1 -1A1 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.A1
5 7000232 1 -1A2 Simatic ET 200SP 4 x DO 24VDC; 2A C3/6.B1
6 7000228 1 -1A2 Baseunit BU15-P16+A0+2B Terminal module, Bridged to left C3/3.B1
7 7000588 1 -1A2 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/6.B1
8 7000102 1 -1A2 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.B1
10 7000231 1 -1A3 Simatic ET 200SP 8 x DI 24VDC C3/6.B1
B 14
15
7000231
7000588
1
1
-1A4
-1A4
Simatic ET 200SP 8 x DI 24VDC
Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips
C3/6.C1
C3/6.C1
B
16 7000102 1 -1A4 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.C1
18 7000231 1 -1A5 Simatic ET 200SP 8 x DI 24VDC C3/6.A3
19 7000588 1 -1A5 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/6.A3
20 7000102 1 -1A5 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.A3
22 7000231 1 -1A6 Simatic ET 200SP 8 x DI 24VDC C3/6.B3
26 7000231 1 -1A7 Simatic ET 200SP 8 x DI 24VDC C3/6.C3
C 27 7000588 1 -1A7 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/6.C3 C
28 7000102 1 -1A7 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.C3
30 7000233 1 -1A8 Simatic ET 200SP 4 x DO relay NO ; 5A C3/6.D3
31 7000588 1 -1A8 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/6.D3
32 7000102 1 -1A8 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.D3
33 7000260 1 -1M1 Simatic ET 200SP, Motor Starter, reverse, 0.25 KW / 400 V,0.3A...1A C2/9.C3
34 7000258 1 -1M1 BU for ET 200SP motor starter with infeed 24V and 500V C2/9.C3
35 7000451 1 -1M1 Additional mounting BU for ET 200SP motor starter C2/9.C3
36 7000588 1 -1M1 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C2/9.C3
37 7000102 1 -1M1 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C2/9.C3
D 39
40
7000259
7000451
1
1
-1M2
-1M2
BU for ET 200SP motor starter without infeed
Additional mounting BU for ET 200SP motor starter
C2/9.C4
C2/9.C4
D
44 7000259 1 -2M1 BU for ET 200SP motor starter without infeed C2/9.C5
49 7000259 1 -2M2 BU for ET 200SP motor starter without infeed C2/9.C6
E 52 7000102 1 -2M2 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C2/9.C6 E
53 7001015 1 -A2 10.1" touch panel, X2 C3/2.D8
54 5000008 1 -A2 Ring Cable Shoe S0822022 - M4 C3/2.D8
55 7000228 1 -BU-Cover Baseunit BU15-P16+A0+2B Terminal module, Bridged to left C1/3.D3
56 7000452 1 -BU-Cover Simatic ET200SP, 5 BU-Cover, 15mm, To portect empty slots C3/6.D3
57 7000588 1 -BU-Cover Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/6.D3
58 7000102 1 -BU-Cover Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/6.D3
59 7000110 1 -Cabinet Marking strips 11 mm C1/2.D4
60 7000750-10 1 -Cabinet Cabinet 600x760x210 (WxHxD) C1/2.D4
61 7000744-01 1 -Cabinet Rail for AX, D:210 C1/2.D4
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
REFERENCE LIST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
62 7000766-01 1 -Cabinet Drawing pocket, 600 C1/2.D4
63 7000743-01 1 -Cabinet Doorstay for AX C1/2.D4
A 64 4001319-03 1 -Cabinet Decal FFS Logo-address 60 C1/2.D4 A
65 4001882-02 1 -Cabinet Decal Warning several supplies C1/2.D4
66 4001882-01 1 -De1 Decal Warning Power Fi-Fi ON C1/2.A1
67 7000016 1 -E10 Earth/neutral busbar 63A C3/2.E6
68 3000175 2 -E10 Socket Screw, ISO 4672-M5x16 C3/2.E6
69 7000052 1 -F0 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 10A, C-type, 15kA, 400V C3/2.C1
70 7000103 1 -F0 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/2.C1
71 7000052 1 -F0B Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 10A, C-type, 15kA, 400V C3/2.C1
72 7000103 1 -F0B Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/2.C1
73 6000407 1 -F1 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 6A, C-type, 15kA, 400V C3/2.A2
74 7000103 1 -F1 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/2.A2
B 75
76
6000472
6000405
1
1
-F3
-F3
Aux. contact for circuit breaker
Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 2A, C-type, 15kA, 400V
C3/2.B5
C3/2.A5
B
78 6000472 1 -F4 Aux. contact for circuit breaker C3/2.B6
C 88 7000052 1 -F10 Circuit breaker 2 Pole, 10A, C-type, 15kA, 400V C3/1.B3 C
89 7000103 1 -F10 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/1.B3
90 7000474 1 -K3:1 Contactor, 2NO+2NC, 24VDC C3/3.D3
91 7000103 1 -K3:1 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/3.D3
98 7000025 1 -K7 Rail-mounted terminal block with miniature switching relay 24VDC C3/2.B1
99 7000109 1 -K7 WMB Inline 5-5,2 C3/2.B1
D 100
101
7000025
7000109
1
1
-K8
-K8
Rail-mounted terminal block with miniature switching relay 24VDC
WMB Inline 5-5,2
C3/2.B2
C3/2.B2
D
106 7000486 1 -P1 Connector IE FC RJ45 PLUG 90 2x2 C2/2.B3
110 7000437 1 -U1 SIMATIC DP, CPU 1510SP-1 PN FOR ET 200SP C3/2.E3
111 7000226 1 -U1 Simatic Busadapter Profinet 2xRJ45 C2/2.B4
112 7000588 1 -U1 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/2.E3
E 113 7000225 1 -U1 Simatic S7 Memory card for S7-1X00 CPU Sinamics, 4Mb C3/2.E3 E
114 7000726 2 -U1 End retainer, Steel, Screwable, 10.3mm C3/2.E3
115 7000102 1 -U1 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/2.E3
116 7000226 1 -U2 Simatic Busadapter Profinet 2xRJ45 C1/3.D2
117 7000588 1 -U2 Labeling strips 1 role, 500 strips C3/2.E3
118 7000442-01 1 -U2 Communications processor CP1542SP-1 for SIMATIC ET200SP to IE C3/2.E3
119 7000102 1 -U2 Self adhesive labels 8x20 yellow C3/2.E3
120 7000103 1 -V1 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/2.A1
121 7000653 3 -V1 Isolated flat pin sleeve, (6,3 x 0,8mm), 1,5-2,5mm², Blue C3/2.A1
122 7000654 1 -V1 Faston (6,3x0,8) 1,5-2,5mm2 Blue C3/2.A1
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
REFERENCE LIST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
123 6000473 1 -V1 Diode bridge 35A/1000V,Elfa distrelec C3/2.A1
124 3000175 1 -V1 Socket Screw, ISO 4672-M5x16 C3/2.A1
A 125 7000103 1 -V2 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/2.B1 A
126 7000653 3 -V2 Isolated flat pin sleeve, (6,3 x 0,8mm), 1,5-2,5mm², Blue C3/2.B1
127 7000654 1 -V2 Faston (6,3x0,8) 1,5-2,5mm2 Blue C3/2.B1
128 6000473 1 -V2 Diode bridge 35A/1000V,Elfa distrelec C3/2.B1
129 3000175 1 -V2 Socket Screw, ISO 4672-M5x16 C3/2.B1
130 7000103 1 -V3 Self adhesive labels 7x20 yellow C3/2.B2
131 7000653 3 -V3 Isolated flat pin sleeve, (6,3 x 0,8mm), 1,5-2,5mm², Blue C3/2.B2
132 7000654 1 -V3 Faston (6,3x0,8) 1,5-2,5mm2 Blue C3/2.B2
133 6000473 1 -V3 Diode bridge 35A/1000V,Elfa distrelec C3/2.B2
134 3000175 1 -V3 Socket Screw, ISO 4672-M5x16 C3/2.B2
135 7000143 2 -X1 2-conductor through terminal block C2/1.B2
B 136
137
7000143
7000146
2
4
-X2
-X2:1
2-conductor through terminal block
Terminal block 1+2, grey
C2/1.B3
C3/2.C2
B
139 7000195 3 -X5 Double-deck terminal block C2/5.B2
140 7000143 10 -X7 2-conductor through terminal block C3/4.C1
141 7000146 13 -X8 Terminal block 1+2, grey C3/5.B1
143 7000049 1 -XC1 Ring cable shoe 2.5mm2 8mm C1/3.E5
144 7000049 1 -XC2 Ring cable shoe 2.5mm2 8mm C1/3.E4
145 7000004 1 -Z1 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/3.B2
146 7000419 1 -Z2 Separator plate, 2mm Orange C1/3.B2
147 7000147 1 -Z3 End and intermediate plate, 0.8mm, grey C1/3.B2
C 149 7000004 1 -Z5 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/3.E2 C
150 7000144 1 -Z6 End and intermediate plate, 0.8mm, grey C1/3.E2
151 7000175 1 -Z7 Separator plate , 2 mm, orange C1/3.E2
152 7000004 1 -Z8 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/3.E2
153 7000196 1 -Z9 End and intermediate plate, grey 0,8mm C1/3.E2
159 7000004 1 -Z15 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/3.D4
160 7000144 1 -Z16 End and intermediate plate, 0.8mm, grey C1/3.D4
D 161
162
7000004
7000144
1
1
-Z17
-Z18
Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey
End and intermediate plate, 0.8mm, grey
C1/3.D5
C1/3.D5
D
163 7000004 1 -Z19 Screwless end stop, 6mm, grey C1/3.D5
164 7000050 1 -Z20 End and intermediate plate for, Grey C1/3.B2
167 7000175 1 -Z23 Separator plate , 2 mm, orange C1/3.E2
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
REFERENCE LIST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor
1 7000874 1 -Q1 Safety and maintenance switch, 190x100x93 (HxWxD) C2/5.B1
2 7000874 1 -Q2 Safety and maintenance switch, 190x100x93 (HxWxD) C2/6.B1
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
REFERENCE LIST
MONITOR 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Portable
1 4009565 4 -A1 Screw M4 X 12 C1/5.E1
2 7000026 1 -A1 Rose Panel, Polyamid hand held enclosure,160x105x85 C1/5.E1
A 3 7000629 1 -J3 Plug male insert, 18 pin, 10A spring connection C3/5.D6 A
4 5000012 1 -J3 Cable gland, M25 Ø=12-18mm, black C3/5.D6
5 7000627 1 -J3 T-Type Plastic Hood, Size 57.27, M25 C1/6.C7
6 7000631 1 -P3 Female insert 10A 18P, SQUICH C3/5.C5
7 7000585 1 -P3 T-type rectangular cover with 4 pegs C1/6.C3
8 7000628 1 -P3 Bulkhead mounting housing 2L C1/6.C5
9 7000306 1 -Pl1 Plate for Panel 108 C3/5.D1
10 7000916 1 -S2 Joystick 4 pos switch, Black, 22mm, metal, shiny C3/5.E3
11 7000502 4 -S2 Contact module with 1 NO C3/5.E3
12 7000507 1 -S2 Holder, 4 modules, 22mm switch, Metal C3/5.E3
13 7000922 1 -S3 Momentary, 3 pos. selector switch, Black, 22mm, metal, shiny C3/5.E4
B 14
15
7000502
7000917
2
1
-S3
-S3
Contact module with 1 NO
Holder, 3 modules, 22mm switch, Metal
C3/5.E4
C3/5.E4
B
16 7000916 1 -S6 Joystick 4 pos switch, Black, 22mm, metal, shiny C3/5.E6
19 7000922 1 -S7 Momentary, 3 pos. selector switch, Black, 22mm, metal, shiny C3/5.E7
C C
D D
E E
F 00 15.03.2023 CV GJ
Document type F
REFERENCE LIST
PORTABLE 7604034
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
E
A
00
Rev.
Cable Name Core From To Cable Type Length[m]
-W1 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1M1:L1 +Ship IF-440-480V 3 x 1.5mm + E
Modifications
-W2 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X1:1 +Ship IF-110/220V 2 x 2.5mm + E
1
1
-W2 2 +Main Control Cabinet-X1:2 +Ship IF-110/220V 2 x 2.5mm + E
-W3 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X2:1 +Ship IF-24V 2 x 2.5mm + E

-W3 2 +Main Control Cabinet-X2:2 +Ship IF-24V 2 x 2.5mm + E
-W4 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X3:1 +Ship IF-Backup 24V 2 x 2.5mm + E

-W4 2 +Main Control Cabinet-X3:2 +Ship IF-Backup 24V 2 x 2.5mm + E
-W5 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X7:1 +Bridge Control Panel-X22:1 10 x 1.5mm + E

Date
2
2
15.03.2023
CV
Name
-W6 White +Main Control Cabinet-P3:1 +Bridge Control Panel-P2:1 6XV1840-4AH10

-W6 Yellow +Main Control Cabinet-P3:1 +Bridge Control Panel-P2:1 6XV1840-4AH10
GJ
Apr.
-W6 Blue +Main Control Cabinet-P3:1 +Bridge Control Panel-P2:1 6XV1840-4AH10
-W6 Orange +Main Control Cabinet-P3:1 +Bridge Control Panel-P2:1 6XV1840-4AH10
-W10 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X10:1 +Valves-V1:11 4 x 1.5mm + E
3
3


-W20 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A5:5 +Valves-V1:17 4 x 1.5mm + E

4
4
-W30 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1M1:T1 +Monitor-Q1:1L1 6 x 1.5mm + E
5
5
-W30.1 1 +Monitor-Q1:1T1 +Monitor-M1:1 6 x 1.5mm + E
-W31 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X5:1 +Monitor-M1:7 10 x 1.5mm + E

-W31 3 +Main Control Cabinet-1A5:1 +Monitor-M1:9 10 x 1.5mm + E
6
6

CABLE LIST

7
7

Document type
Drawing number

7604034

8
8

Next

2
Sheet 1
YARD WIRING LIST
F
E
A
D
F
E
A
00
Rev.
Cable Name Core From To Cable Type Length[m]
-W40 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X5:5 +Gear-XPC1:1 8 x 1.5mm + E
-W40 2 +Main Control Cabinet-X5:6 +Gear-XPC1:2 8 x 1.5mm + E
-W40 3 +Main Control Cabinet-1A7:5 +Gear-XPC1:3 8 x 1.5mm + E
Modifications
1
1
-W50 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A8:1 +Ship IF-Relay output Common Alarm 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 2 +Main Control Cabinet-1A8:5 +Ship IF-Relay output Common Alarm 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A8:2 +Ship IF-Relay output Clutch 1 Request Fi-Fi 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 2 +Main Control Cabinet-1A8:6 +Ship IF-Relay output Clutch 1 Request Fi-Fi 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A8:3 +Ship IF-Relay output Clutch 1 Engaged 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
Date
-W50 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A7:1 +Ship IF-Relay input M.Engine 1 Ready for FI-FI:3 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
2
2
-W50 2 +Main Control Cabinet-1A7:9 +Ship IF-Relay input M.Engine 1 Ready for FI-FI:4 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
15.03.2023
-W50 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A7:2 +Ship IF-Relay input M.Engine 1 80% load:3 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
CV
Name
-W50 1 +Main Control Cabinet-1A7:4 +Ship IF-Relay input M.Engine 1 Stopped:3 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 2 +Main Control Cabinet-1A7:12 +Ship IF-Relay input M.Engine 1 Stopped:4 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 1 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
GJ
Apr.
-W50 2 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 1 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
-W50 2 20 x 1.5mm + E-SH
3
3
-W52 1 +Main Control Cabinet-X8:1 +Portable-P3:1 13 x 1.5mm + E

4
4
5
5
6
6
CABLE LIST
7
7
Document type
Drawing number
7604034
8
8
Next
1
Sheet 2
YARD WIRING LIST
F
E
A
D
CONTROL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Document No: FFS777-Installation Instruction for Profinet
Installation instruction for Profinet in

Fire Fighting Systems AS control systems
Version Description Written by Approved Date
#0.0 Second Release CV AV 27.05.2019

#0.0 First Release CV AV 26.02.2019
1 SAFETY ANNOTATIONS 2
2 INSTALLATION 3
2.1 Safety 3
2.2 Inspection 3
3 INTRODUCTION 4
4 PROFINET 5
4.1 Cable 5
4.2 Plugs 5
4.2.1 Plug reference 5
4.3 Assembly guides for Plug and Cable 6
4.3.1 Assembly for 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0 6
4.3.1.1 Diagnostics 8
4.3.2 Assembly for 6GK1901-1BB*0-2AA0 9
5 REPAIR / SPARE PARTS 10

Tykkemyr 27 e-mail: ffs@fifisystems.com
N-1597 MOSS www.fifisystems.com
NORWAY
Page - 1 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
1 Safety Annotations
All safety directions must be respected in order to avoid damage to personnel, environment and
equipment. In this user manual the following annotations are used with belonging signification:
DANGER / Warning
Indicates possibilities for hazards or unsafe practices, which could result in fatal
or severe personnel injuries or substantial product or property damage, if the
required precautions are not taken.
CAUTION!
Indicates possibilities for hazards or unsafe practices, which COULD result in minor personnel
injuries and/or property damage, if the required precautions are not taken.
Note
Draws attention to specific information of technical significance which might not be obvious to
specialist personnel, or points at important remarks in the procedures to follow.

NORWAY
Page - 2 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
2 Installation
2.1 Safety
DANGER
• Only qualified personnel must carry out the installation.
• The directions in this manual must be followed.
• Verify the power supply is switched off during installation.
• Verify the installation is done in accordance with the latest drawing revisions from
Fire Fighting Systems AS.
• Verify the Yard wiring is connected according to the drawing.
2.2 Inspection
1. Inspect the control cabinet and bridge panel for mechanical damage.
2. Check markings and signs on the equipment against material specification for the order.
3. Check the supplied plug(s) are according to the electrical drawing supplied with the system.
4. Check the supplied wire between the control panel and terminal is not damaged.

NORWAY
Page - 3 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
3 Introduction
This manual describes cables and plugs, and correct installation of these for use with control
systems from Fire Fighting Systems AS.
See the electrical drawing located inside the main control system cabinet. Verify this drawing is of
the latest revision before wiring and plug termination for the bus system is started.
Below is the symbol used in the electrical drawing to indicate where the bus wires are terminated.
Used for Profinet bus system. Text notations on symbol may vary.

NORWAY
Page - 4 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
4 Profinet
4.1 Cable
• Profinet cable type recommended by Fire Fighting Systems AS is Siemens IE FC TP
Marine Cable 2 x 2 (6XV1840-4AH10). Cable is ordered by Meters[m], minimum
order is 20m.
• If a cable other then 6XV1840-4AH10 is used, Fire Fighting Systems AS cannot guarantee
the bus communication will work properly.
4.2 Plugs
Plug type is dependent upon system components and system configuration. See electrical drawing
to verify the correct plug is used for the correct component.
4.2.1 Plug reference

Plug types used in control systems from Fire Fighting Systems AS.
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0 6GK1901-1BB30-0AA0
6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

NORWAY
Page - 5 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
4.3 Assembly guides for Plug and Cable
4.3.1 Assembly for 6ES7193-6AF00-0AA0

BusAdaper BA 2xFC with locking mechanism open.
Procedure:
1. Strip insulation from sheath of the profinet connection cable as follows:
Profinet connecting cable

2. Pull back the locking slide and fold up the cover of the connection element.
3. Pull up the wire guide as far as it will go.
4. Insert the unstripped single cores of the PROFINET connecting cable into the cable
routing as far as it will go. Firmly press down the wire guide as far as it will go.
Please refer to the color coding.
5. Close the cover of the connection element. Then push the locking slide forwards as far as it
will go.
6. Screw the BusAdapter BA 2×FC to the PROFINET device (1 screw with 0.2 Nm
tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade, alternatively
TX10.
Instructions continue on the next page.

NORWAY
Page - 6 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
① Locking slide ③ Shield contact

② Wire guide ④ PROFINET connecting cable
BusAdapter BA 2xFC installed:
① CPU ③ PROFINET connecting cable
② BA 2xFC BusAdapter ④ Connection element

NORWAY
Page - 7 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
4.3.1.1 Diagnostics
① LK1 (green)
② LK2 (green)
LK1/LK2 LEDs on the BusAdapter
LED
Meaning Remedy
LK1/LK2
There is no Ethernet connection between Check whether the bus cable
the PROFINET IO interface of your to the switch or IO controller
off PROFINET device and a communication is disconnected.
partner, e.g. IO controller.
There is Ethernet connection between the -
PROFINET IO interface of your
on PROFINET device and a communication
partner, e.g. IO controller.
The "Node flash test" is running. -
The RN/ER/MT LEDs are also flashing.
flashes

NORWAY
Page - 8 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
4.3.2 Assembly for 6GK1901-1BB*0-2AA0
If Siemens cable stripping tool (6GK1901-1GA00) is not available, jump to step 10.
1. Use the green knife cassette 2. Take the stripping tool in your right 4. Insert the cable into the stripping tool.
6GK1901-1GB01 (5.1 mm knife hand. Your left index finger is the limit stop.
clearance) in the stripping tool. 3. Measure the cable length against the 5. Tighten the stripping tool fully.
measuring template. Use your left
If your stripping tool was supplied with a index finger as the limit stop.
yellow knife cassette, the cutting depth
must be adjusted with the middle
socket-head screw after fitting the new
cassette!
6. To strip the insulation, turn the tool 7. Keeping the stripping tool closed, pull it 8. If the white filler is not removed with the
in the direction of the arrow off the end of the cable along with the insulation, remove it and the transparent
jacket and remnants of the shield. protective foil with your hand.
- approx. 4 times for PVC insulation, 9. Cut off the dummy cores.
- approx. 8 times for PUR insulation.
10. Spread out the wires according to 12. Open the holder cover (e) until it 13. Push the cable into position as shown
the color markings on the contact latches and push in the wires in the picture (see arrows). Press
elements of the connector. according to their color coding* as far down the contact elements as far as
11. Make sure to observe a length of as the limit stop in the holder cover the limit stop to contact the wires.
approximately 18mm. 14. Make sure the length of the cores
corresponds to the dimensions stated
in the assembly instructions for the
respective plugs.
15. Close the cover by pressing 17. Insert a 2.5 mm screwdriver into the 19. Releasing the plug
together the two halves of the lock. hole in the locking mechanism and turn Insert the plug into the socket and push
In doing so, make sure not to exert it as far as the limit stop. the spring down to unlock the plug and
pressure on or damage the latch 18. The connector is correctly locked when release it from the socket again.
spring. the opening of the locking mechanism If space is limited, release the plug
16. Turn the locking mechanism with is pointing to the side and the surfaces using a screwdriver (2.5 mm-wide
your hand as far as possible in the are flush with the surface of the blade).
direction of the arrow. connector.

NORWAY
Page - 9 -
CONTROL SYSTEM
5 Repair / Spare parts
• Spare parts are available from Fire Fighting Systems upon request.
E-mail: Spareparts@fifisystems.com
• See separate spare parts lists for the different equipment.

NORWAY
Page - 10 -
3 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
FOAM INDUCTOR Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 03

CONTENTS
03 1 FFS-600FiA Foam inductor adjustable 2
03A Rev Date: 07/03/2023
FOAM INDUCTOR Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 2
ITEM NO. 03 FFS-600FiA

General information
Quantity 1
Model FFS-600FiA
Series FFS FiA
Operation Foam inductor adjustable
Manufacturer Fire Fighting Systems AS
Design Criteria
Fluid Sea water/foam liquid
Flange standard DN150 DIN
Pressure class PN16
Technical data
Capacity - foam Max 300 l/min @3%
Inlet pressure 14 bar
System ∆p 35% approx
Nozzle type Adjustable 1-3%
Nozzle settings 3%
Weight 23 kg
Water connection DN150
Foam connection BSP 2" Female
Material
Nozzle Bronze Alloy
Diffusor POM
Check valve Brass/plastic material
Surface Treatment
Base NA
Coating NA
Documentation
Works test certificate NA
Type approval Yes
Capacity curve NA
Dimensional drawing 303B-21 sh2a
Data sheet FFS 353
Instruction manual FFS-239
FFS-353
Foam Inductor
FFS 600FiA
Description
The FFS Foam inductor Adjustable is designed as a simple and reliable construction and
offers a unique combination of high performance in relation to weight and dimensions.
The Foam inductor is for installation in the piping system between the water pump and the
monitor(s). A typical installation is in a by-pass line around the discharge valve to save
pressure loss when Foam inductor is not in operation. The Foam inductor is of wafer type
and is installed between two flanges. Suction height of foam liquid must be considered.
The Foam inductor generate vacuum and inject foam into the water line according to speci-
fied mixing ratio. It is equipped with a check valve to prevent water from inadvertently enter-
ing the foam tank and a metering valve for foam mixture setting.
Each Foam inductor is order specific for each system and FFS ensure the correct perfor-
mance according to pressure and water flow calculation.
The material for the Foam inductor is bronze alloy with excellent corrosion resistance and
the diffuser is composite.
Due to the simple construction the FFS Foam inductor is reliable and require no mainte-
nance.

Contact us
FFS-353
Foam Inductor
FFS 600FiA

- High quality Bronze and Composite materials
Weight 23kg
- Sea water compatible
Mixing ratio Adjustable 0-3%
- Adjustable flow setting
Pressure drop Appr. 35% of inlet pressure
Materials Bronze / Composites (POM)
Flange connection DN150 DIN Wafer PN16/PN25
Static pressure testing 1,5 times operation pressure
Inlet pressure According to pump curve
Suction height of liquid Nominal 3m
Pressure class PN20
Nominal capacity water 600 m³/hour
Nominal capacity foam 0-18 m³/hour
Foam connection BSP 2” female

Contact us
Document No.: FFS-239 Revision 02
Operation and Maintenance Instruction

FFS 300Fi(A) – FFS 600Fi(A) Foam Inductors
Document no. : FFS -239 Document control

Version Description Written Approved Date
by
02 Text spelling RS OIB 2011-07.12
01 Installation RS OIB 2007-08.14
00 First Release RS OIB 2006-03.28
Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1
2 INSTALLATION 2
2.1 Safety precautions 2
2.2 Inspection 2
2.3 Installation 2
3 OPERATION 3
3.1 Start up and Commissioning 3
3.2 Trouble shooting 3
4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 3
4.1 Maintenance 3
4.2 Inspection 3
5 REFERENCES 3
5.1 FFS 300Fi 3
5.2 FFS 600Fi 3
5.3 FFS 300FiA 3
5.4 FFS 600FiA 3
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This document is made to describe the operation and maintenance of the foam mixing
inductor FFS 300Fi to FFS 600Fi designed and manufactured by FFS AS.
The FFS Foam inductors offer a unique combination of high performance in relation to
weight and dimensions.
Material for the Foam inductor is bronze alloy with superb corrosion resistance and diffuser
is composite (POM).
The Foam inductor generates vacuum and inject foam into the water line according to
specified mixing ratio. The Foam inductor is equipped with a check valve to prevent water
from accidentally entering the foam tank.

NORWAY
Page 1 of 3
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Safety precautions

The installation is uncomplicated, but must be performed by qualified personnel. The
directives given in this manual must be followed closely.
Only use approved and certified lifting gear for performing lifting operation.
2.2 Inspection
Inspect the Foam inductor carefully for any signs of transport damage or other deviations
which may have occurred during transport. Make sure that all equipment and parts are
available.
2.3 Installation
The Foam inductor is for installation in the piping system between the water pump and
the monitor(s). A typical installation is in a by-pass line around the discharge valve. The
Foam inductor is of wafer type and is installed between two flanges with the diffuser part
inserted in the pipeline (se picture below). Make sure the Foam inductor is installed in
correct flow direction. Installation is recommended low as possible in the engine room,
but normally not more than 3m higher than the bottom of the foam tank. Ensure straight
pipe at least 0,5m before and 1m after the Foam inductor.
Place a standard gasket on each side of the Foam inductor and make sure that the correct
no. of bolts and nuts are available. Ensure gaskets is in place between the flanges before
the bolts are inserted. Tighten the bolts in cross-sequence up to the recommended torque
of 385 Nm.
Connect the foam pipe to the Foam inductor and ensure the pipe size to the foam tank is
minimum same as the connection to the Foam inductor.

NORWAY
Page 2 of 3
3 OPERATION
3.1 Start up and Commissioning
1. Ensure the foam tank is filled with foam liquid (alternative water or test foam for testing).
2. For FFS Foam inductors FFS-FiA (Adjustable), select the correct foam consentrate setting by
the handle. For the FFS-Fi (not adjustable), the foam consentrate setting is fixed by factory.
3. Run the monitors with water and switch to “Foam mode” / ”Reduced Capacity” if applicable.
4. Open the main valve for the Foam inductor.
5. Ensure water is only running trough the inductor by closing other valves installed by-pass the
Foam inductor (i.e. main discharge valve, by-pass discharge valve).
6. Ensure the pump is running with correct pressure (operating speed).
7. Open the foam suction valve.
8. Check foam is coming out of the monitor or other foam equipment.
9. Check valves are in correct position after running the Foam inductor.
3.2 Trouble shooting

If no foam is produced during operation check the following:
1. Ensure the valves are in correct position.
2. Ensure the pump is running with correct pressure.
3. Check no air is coming into the foam line trough leaking flanges, valves or connections.
4. Check the suction line is not blocked.
5. Ensure the check valve on the Foam inductor is not jammed.
6. Check the counter pressure on the Foam inductor outlet is not more than 2/3 of inlet pressure.
If the counter pressure is too high, the monitor nozzle may be adjusted to higher capacity.
4 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
4.1 Maintenance
The Foam inductor does not require any regular maintenance.
4.2 Inspection
Visually inspect the Foam inductor for any occurred damages,
5 REFERENCES
5.1 FFS 300Fi 5.3 FFS 300FiA

• Dimensional drawing FFS 236 • Dimensional drawing 303B-21 sh2
• Data sheet FFS 236 • Data sheet FFS 321
5.2 FFS 600Fi 5.4 FFS 600FiA

• Dimensional drawing FFS 236 • Dimensional drawing 303A-21 sh2
• Data sheet FFS 236 (outer dimensions as FFS 300FiA)
• Data sheet FFS 353

NORWAY
Page 3 of 3
6 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
FIRE PUMP Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 06

CONTENTS
Item No: Qty Type Location Sheet No
678 1 SFP 150x200 XP 700 m3/h 120 mlc Stbd 2
06E Rev Date: 07/03/2023
FIRE PUMP Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 2
ITEM NO. 678 SFP150x200XP Stbd

General information
Quantity 1
Pump series SFP XP
Model SFP 150x200 XP
Manufacturer FFS
Design Single stage Centrifugal
Execution Horizontal inlet, vertical outlet
Casing Radial split
Suction Single
Design Criteria Pump part
Fluid Sea water
Suction flange DN200 DIN
Discharge flange DN150 DIN
Pressure class, suction PN16
Pressure class, discharge PN16
Design Criteria Transmission part
Design Helical Wheel
Execution Horizontal
Clutch Internal hydraulic wet multidisk
Technical data
Direction of rotation seen from input shaft C.C.W.
Engine Speed 1800 rpm
Impeller Speed 2100 rpm
Ratio 1 : 1.167
Pump Capacity 700 m3/h
Head 120 mlc
Power 332+1,5% kW
Input Torque 1788 Nm
NPSH (R) 6.6 meter
Impeller rotation C.W.
Impeller diameter 478 millimeter
Hydraulic efficiency 70.7 %
Weight 295 kg
Shaft seal Non-leaking seal
Remote Control Yes
Cooler NA
Oil 12 litres of ISO VG 100 transmission oil
Power supply See item02 drawing C1/C2
Material
Casing Nodular Cast Iron
Shaft Duplex stainless steel
Impeller Duplex stainless steel
Surface Treatment
Base Primer
Coating RAL 3002, Red
Documentation
Works Test Sheet/Type approval Yes
Approval NA
Engine room arrangement F505286 E1
TVC input F505286 T1
Pump capacity calculation F505286A~H Rev.00
Pump performance curve F505286A~H Rev.00
Suction side losses & NPSHa F505286A~H Rev.00
General data FFS-657, FFS-215
Flexible bellow instruction Use of flexible bellows
Dimension print E328R
Sectional drawing NA
Parts list NA
Instruction manual FFS-352
Pump capacity calculation
Project: F505286A-H
Customer Mark Marine
Calc.: RTE
Date: 08-03-23 23:20
Following conditions apply:

Estimated 3x90° bends, 2 reducers Estimated 2x reducer/difusor
Water velocity 4 m/s Discharge valve - butterfly valve
Hot dip galvanized pipes and bends Component drop is based on monitor capacity
SYSTEM CAPACITY PUMP HEAD

3
Monitor 1 350 m /h
3
Monitor 2 350 m /h Pump capacity
Monitor 3 m3/h -for monitors 700 m3/h
Monitor 4 m3/h
Monitor 5 m3/h Monitor inlet 100.0 m
Monitor 6 m3/h Altitude 10.3 m
Monitor 7 m3/h Pipe loss 8.0 m
Monitor 8 m3/h Foam propoportioner 0.00 m ..PP-
Monitor 9 m3/h Discharge valve 1.33 m ..DN- 150
Monitor 10 m3/h Backvalve 0.00 m ..DN-
Waterspray m3/h Compensator m ..DN-
Deck head 1 m3/h Additional losses 0.4 m
Deck head 2 m3/h
Deck head 3 m3/h Pump head 120.0 m
3
m /h
m3/h
m3/h
m3/h
Tot. capacity 700 m3/h
Pump schedule :
Pump 1 700
Pump 2
Pump 3
Pump 4
Pump 5
Pump 6
...\Beregninger\1) F505286A-H PH.xls

Document No.
Pump performance curve FFS535
Project No. Reference curve
SFP 150x200 F505286A~H 15002
Remarks Discharge Date
Mark Marine & Investments - FZCO, Hull no: MM001~MM008. 150 mm 13/3/2023
Density Viscosity Testnorm Rated speed NPSH
1.025 kg/dm3 1 mm2/s ISO 9906:2012 Grade 2b 2100 rpm 6.6 m
Flow Head Rated power Hydraulic efficiency Impeller diameter
700 m3/h 120 m 332 kW 70.7 % 478 mm
H (m)
180
2100 rpm
160
140
1800 rpm
120
NPSH
100 (m)
10
80 9
8
7
60
6
5
40
4
3
20 2
1
80% 0
60%
Efficiency
40%
20%
400
350 2100 rpm
300
Power (kW)
250
1800 rpm
200
150
100
50
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Capacity (m3/h)
FFS Pump Selector 1.1.9 2020-11-24

Written by: OIB/RS 14.11.2011 Rev.01
Calculation of suction side losses and NPSHa

Project: F505286A-H
Calc. by: RTE
Date: 08-03-23 23:25
Following conditions apply:

Atmospheric pressure: 1,013x10 5 N/m 2 Drag coefficient ζ for reducers: 0,02
Liquid: Seawater Sea chest area is twice the largest suction pipe area
Hot dip galvanized pipes and bends
Bends 90 deg.
Input chart Result chart

x): Input not necessary if calculating suction side losses only
Required NPSHr : x) 6.6 m Velocity in line A : 6.19 m/s

Note: To be found from pump curve Velocity in line B : 2.02 m/s
Liquid level above impeller centreline: x) 2m
Note: Negative value if liquid level is below impeller Suction side losses:
Seawater temperature: x) 30 °C Pipe A : 0.072 m
Note: Choose either 20 or 30 deg.C Pipe B : 0.005 m
Flow in suction line : 700 m3/h Bend(s) C : 0.996 m
Pipe A: Inside diameter : 0.2 m Bend(s) D : m
Note: Near pump Length : 0.35 m Reducer(s) E : 0.039 m
Pipe B: Inside diameter : 0.35 m Reducer(s) F : m
Length : 0.5 m Valve G : 0.351 m
Bend C: Inside diameter : 0.2 m Valve H : m
Number of bends : 1 Sea chest 0.055 m
Radius ratio (R/d) : 1 Strainer : m
Bend D: Inside diameter : m Flexible bellow : m
Number of bends : Additional losses : m
Radius ratio (R/d) :
Reducer E: Outlet diameter : 0.2 m Total suction side losses : 1.518 m
Number of reducers : 1
Reducer F: Outlet diameter : m
Number of reducers : Available NPSHa : 10.212 m
Valve G: Cv-factor : 4281
Valve H: Cv-factor : Required NPSHr : 6.600 m
Strainer: Cv-factor:
Flex. bellow: Cv-factor : The following condition must be satisfied :
Additional losses : m
NPSHa > NPSHr
Condition satisfied
Page 1 of 1
FFS-657
Fi-Fi Pump w/clutch

SFP 150x200XP
Description
The SFP 150x200XP Fire Fighting pump is a light weight single stage centrifugal pump with horizontal inlet
and vertical outlet. The pump is designed to be driven by engine PTO via flexible coupling. It is specially
designed for long term reliable fire fighting duty onboard tugs, offshore vessels and dedicated fire boats. The
pump is designed and manufactured in Scandinavia in accordance with the highest quality standards for
marine use. The pump is also used in various onshore applications
The unit is equipped with a clutch of the multi-disc type. The clutch is engaged by means of hydraulic power
from a built in hydraulic pump. The clutch is designed for engagement in the total speed range. The hydraulic
pump is also providing lubrication and cooling. The standard material for pump shaft and impeller is duplex
stainless steel with superb strength and corrosion resistance. The pump is intended for remote operation.
The suction performance of the impeller (NPSH) has been optimized by using the latest technology in 3D flow
design. The complete pump rotor assembly is balanced prior to installation to maintain a vibration free
function in the total range of the pump.
Main castings and machining of parts are all done in Scandinavia. Each pump is assembled, pressure- and
function tested in our 8,000 sq. m. (85,000 sq. feet) factory in Sweden with highly qualified personnel and the
latest ISO 9001 management system. Performance test for very single pump is done in accordance with ISO
9906: 2012, grade 2B.
Our pumps have type approvals and certifications from a wide range of classification societies.

Contact us
FFS-657
Fi-Fi Pump w/clutch

SFP 150x200XP

·High quality Stainless Steel / Ni-Al Bronze materials
Pump Type SFP 150x200XP
·Sea water compatible
Nominal flow 600 m3/h (2,640 US gpm) ·Direction of rotation CW or CCW
Nominal Head/Pressure 13.5 barg (195 psi) ·Built in hydraulic operated multi disc clutch
Max. Nom. Torque in 1,790Nm ·Pressure gauge and switch
·Temperature gauge and switch
Weight 295 kg ·Oil filter w/clogging indicator
Inlet flange DN200 / PN16 DIN 2526 Form A ·Remote operation from FFS control system
Outlet flange DN150 / PN16 DIN 2526 Form A ·Compact design
·Local emergency operation
Pump Casing Nod. Cast Iron
Impeller Duplex Stainless Steel Other Characteristics
Shaft Duplex Stainless Steel ·Coating RAL 3002
Shaft sealing Non-leaking seal ·Junction box
Wear Rings High-quality bronze ·Hydrostatic test at 24 barg
·Performance test acct. ISO 9906: 2012, grade 2B
Power supply solenoid 24VCD
·Certified FAT
Transmission Casing Aluminium
Options
·Ni-Al Bronze casing
·Flexible coupling for input shaft

Contact us
Written by: RS Rev.00
Sheet no: FFS215
Alignment of pump
/gearbox / clutch
泵和齿轮箱的正确校直是十分重要的。这样做能够减少震动, 以及减轻连在联合器上所有零
件的负载. 本文将为您展示 Fi-Fi 系统的联合器的校直过程.
Proper alignment for pump and gearbox is important. This will reduce vibrations, excessive wear
and load on all the components connected to the couplings. This document shows the procedure
for coupling alignment for a Fi-Fi system.
角度校直 Angular Alignment

在其中一段联合器的中部添加一个千分表,让表的
指针指向另外半边(如 Fig.1 所示).一起转动轴和
表并读出表的读数, 从而检测所需校直公差的必
要调整.Attach a clock gauge to one of the coupling
halves, letting the point of the gauge rest on the
other half surface side (Fig. 1). Turning the shaft and
gauge together and reading the gauge will detect
necessary adjustments to obtain the alignment
tolerance requirement.
Fig. 1 Angular alignment with clock gauge
弧度校直 Radial Alignment
在其中一段联合器的中部添加一个千分表,让表的
指针指向另外半边(如 Fig.2 所示). 一起转动轴和
表并读出表的读数, 从而检测所需校直公差的必
要调整.Attach a clock gauge to one of the coupling
halves, letting the point of the gauge rest on the
other coupling half radially (Fig. 2). Turning the
shaft and gauge together and reading the gauge will
detect necessary adjustments to obtain the alignment
tolerance requirement.
校直公差 Alignment tolerances

一般情况下, 必须的校直公差会在联合器生产商
所提供的文件中得到.如果这些公差不能查到, 以
下的数值可以作为参考: In most cases the required
alignment tolerances are given in the documentation
from the coupling manufacturer. If these tolerances Fig. 2 Radial alignment with clock gauge
are not known, the following values can be used as
guidelines:

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
G:\Teknikk\1Tegninger & Dok\Instruksjoner\FFS-215_alignment_Chinese_English.doc

Page 1 of 3
Sheet no: FFS215
柔性联合器 Flexible couplings

角度(Fig.1 所示)最大值:0.1°(0,1° = 相当于
距轴中心线 100 毫米距离中的 0,17 毫
米)Angular (Fig. 1) is maximum: 0,1° (0,1° =
0,17mm at a distance of 100mm from shaft
centre line).
弧度(Fig.2 所示)最大是 0.2 毫米.Radial
(Fig. 2) is maximum 0,2mm.
牙型联合器 Tooth couplings

角度(Fig.1 所示)最大:0.1 毫米 Angular
(Fig. 1) is maximum: 0,1mm at surface on
the hub end.
Radial (Fig. 2) is maximum: 0,1mm.
总术 General
如果泵已经和传动器一起装好在普通的底座上，If the pump has been supplied mounted
together with the driver on a common base frame, preliminary alignment has been done prior to
dispatch from our works. Ensure that the base frame is evenly supported on the foundation bed. In
this way alignment is not affected when tightening the base frame bolts to the foundation.
注意:ATTENTION!
最后的校直必须在以下环节完成后才能执行 Final alignment must be carried out after the
following activities are completed:
• 按照螺钉的大小和类型,把固定螺钉已经正确地 Fixing bolts have been correctly tightened
with torque according to bolt size and type.
• 管道已经连好，并经过压力测试.管道支撑承受着负载.Piping has been connected and
pressure tested. Pipe supports are carrying the loads.
• 在达到一个稳定的轴承温度下泵才能运作.Pump has been operating until a stable bearing
temperature has been reached.
• 泵的支撑不负任何载荷.The pump support does
not carry any load.
校直结果 Alignment result

请把校直数据填入下表中并发给 Fire Fighting Systems AS .Please fill in the measured
alignment results in the table below and return to Fire Fighting Systems AS.

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95

Page 2 of 3
Sheet no: FFS215
左舷柔性联合器 PORT Flexible Coupling 右舷柔性联合器 S/B Flexible Coupling
左舷齿式联合器 PORT Tooth Coupling 右舷齿式联合器 S/B Tooth Coupling
Prepared By: ______________________________
Signature: ______________________________
Company Stamp: _____________________________

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95

Page 3 of 3
Document No: FFS-253
Written by: OIB
Rev.00 / 17.07.2002
Use of Flexible Bellows in

Fi-Fi Pump Applications
Flexible Bellow on Pump Suction Side

A flexible bellow on the suction side of the pump
is not a requirement, but this arrangement can Flexible bellow
sometimes be useful (Fig. 1). In this way pipe
stresses caused by installation errors or movements
of the vessel is not so easily transferred to the
pump.
If a flexible bellow is used, it must be located
between the pump flange and the inlet valve. This
is for safety reasons in case of bellow rupture. Butterfly
valve
The bellow should have an inside diameter
Fig. 1 Pump with flexible bellow on suction side
corresponding to the diameter of the connected
pipe. To minimise suction losses, the inside
diameter of the bellow must have a smooth
cylindrical surface.
Flexible Bellow on Pump Pressure Side

A flexible bellow on the pressure side of the pump
can sometimes be useful to simplify the pipe Butterfly
installation. As with the bellow on the suction side, Valve
Flexible bellow
these components are not required by FFS. Tension rods
Important
The flexible bellow must have a pressure rating
corresponding to the maximum outlet pressure of
the pump.
A flexible bellow on the pump pressure side
MUST be equipped with tension rods (Fig. 2)
These rods must be adjusted to absorb pipe forces
after pump and piping has been installed and
Fig. 2 Pump with flexible bellow on pressure side
aligned. Without correct installation of tension
rods, there will be a hydraulic piston effect
between pump and piping. These forces can reach
values of 100 000 – 200 000N and cause great
damage to the installation.

Box 5142 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
N-1503 MOSS e-mail: ffs@fifisystems.co
Page 1 of 1
Terms of Warranty Rev.00
Sheet No: FFS238
保修条例
Terms of Warranty (Russian)
IMPORTANT! –Read this BEFORE installation!
• The pump and/or gear box must be aligned according to FFS instruction, FFS215.
• Alignment check must be executed AFTER pump and/or gear box are tighted to the foundations and pipes.
• Copy of alignment data must be sent to FFS for approval.
• All instructions in the FFS manual must be followed.
• The items above must be followed for the FFS warraty to be valid.
重要指示！ -下列指示必须在安装之前阅读
• 泵和/或齿轮箱必须按照 FFS 的指示来进行校直，根据 FFS215 指示。
• 在泵和/或齿轮箱固定在底座和管子到位以后还必须再重新进行泵和/或齿轮箱的校直。
• 一份校直数据必须送到 FFS 进行审批
• 必须严格遵守 FFS 手册的所有指示。
• 一定要符合以上的条件，才能得到 FFS 有效的保修。

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 1 of 21
Installation, Operation and Maintenance

Instruction
FFS SFP XP(C) and SFP HDXP(C) Series
Pump Units
Document no. : FFS – 352 Document control
Version Description Written Approved Date
by
19 Changed oil viscosity ch. 3.5 RS JPB 11.10.2021
Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2
2 BEFORE INSTALLATION 2
2.1 Warranty Statement 2
2.2 Safety precautions 2
2.3 Inspection 2
2.4 Storage 3
2.5 Reference drawings and documentation 3
2.6 Needed tools and chemicals 3
3 INSTALLATION 4
3.1 Foundation and fastening 4
3.2 Coupling and alignment 4
3.3 Piping 5
3.3.1 Suction side piping 5
3.3.2 Discharge side piping 7
3.4 Electrical connections 8
3.5 Oil filling and cooling 8
4 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING 9
4.1 Starting the driver of the pump unit 9
5 OPERATION 10
5.1 Engaging the pump unit 10
6 MAINTENANCE 12
6.1 Oil change 12
6.2 Oil cooler 13
6.3 Seal Maintenance 14
6.3.1 SFP150x200XP, SFP 250x350XP(C), SFP 150x200XP(C)S, SFP 300x400XP(C) 14
6.3.2 SFP 400x500(HD)XP(C) 15
6.4 Cleaning 15
6.5 Testing alarm switches and gauges 16
6.6 Adjusting Lube and Clutch oil pressures 17
6.7 Maintenance table 18
6.8 Troubleshooting table 19
6.9 Spare parts and Service 21

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 2 of 21
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This document is made to describe the operation and maintenance of the SFP XP series Fire
Fighting System pump units designed by FFS AS.
The FFS SFP XP series offers a unique combination of high performance in relation to weight
and dimensions. The units are robust and require minimal maintenance.
Material for main castings is nodular cast iron. Stainless steel and composites are used for
smaller components. All bearings are separately lubricated by the contained oil. Transmission
components are made of high grade steel.
The components are well protected against external damage as integrated parts of the castings.
2 BEFORE INSTALLATION
2.1 Warranty Statement
• Ref. the relevant project specific Scope of Supply, given to customer with the general
FiFi system offer.
• The instructions given in this document must be followed for the warranty to be valid.
2.2 Safety precautions
• Only use suitable, approved and certified lifting gear for performing lifting operations.
• Certain parts of the unit may reach high surface temperatures during operation (oil
cooler, main casing top etc.). Also, the oil may have a high temperature when changing.
Take proper care when handling.
• Use only clean rags and lint-free paper towels. Cleanliness during assembly is of vital
importance, in order to prevent clogging of hydraulic components.
• Store and handle all hydraulic components with care and in a clean environment.
2.3 Inspection
• Inspect the pump unit carefully for any signs of transport damage or other deviations
which may have occurred during transport. Make sure that all equipment and parts are
available.
• Check ID plate for correct part and serial no.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 3 of 21
2.4 Storage
• The pump unit must be stored in a dry in-house environment above 15 degrees C.
• Do not stack anything on top of the pump unit, neither in its crate nor packed out of this.
Do not stack the unit on top of other equipment.
• Covers fitted to suction and discharge should be retained in place.
• The inside of the oil hydraulic part is protected against corrosion by the oil remnants and
their vapours for short term storage before initial start up (< 12 months).
• The bare metal external surfaces (drive flange or shaft & key) are treated with an
adhering rust preventive agent. This must be removed with proper solvent for
degreasing metal surfaces just before further assembly to the driver of the unit (usually
main engine or genset)
• Every 2 months, rotate the input shaft or input flange at least 1 ½ turns in order to move
the lubrication of the bearings.
• For longer duration storage (> 12 months), please contact FFS for instructions.
2.5 Reference drawings and documentation
• FFS Engineroom Arrangement drawing – project specific with prjoect number and the
suffix E1, E2, E3 etc. – depending of number of units per project, PS/SB/midship
locations etc.
• Coupling drawing and documentation for alignment tolerances
• FFS-657 Data Sheet (SFP150x200XP)
• FFS-470 Data Sheet (SFP150x200XPS)
• FFS-471 Data Sheet (SFP 150x200XPCS)
• FFS-410 Data Sheet (SFP250x350XPC)
• FFS-609 Data Sheet (SFP400x500HDXP)
• FFS-611 Data Sheet (SFP400x500HDXPC)
• FFS-215 Alignment document
• FFS project specific wiring diagrams for electrical connections
2.6 Needed tools and chemicals
• Common metric spanners, socket wrench, torque wrench typ 20-210Nm and Allen keys
• Where applicable - Suitable torque wrench and threadlocking agent as per coupling
manufacturer’s specifications

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 4 of 21
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Foundation and fastening
Refer to FFS project specific Engineroom Arrangement drawing(s)
• Pumps should preferably be installed to make inspection and servicing easy. Ensure that
adequate space exists around the pump unit.
• Ensure that the direction of rotation is correct according to the project specific
documentation.
• The construction of the foundation shall be so that vibrations are prevented, pipe stress
absorbed and distributed. The foundation must be designed to have a structural stiffness
to limit displacement of the pump unit’s input shaft/flange in relation to the driver shaft.
• When designing the pump foundation, the nozzle loadings given in for example API
standard 610, could be used as input for stiffness calculations.
• The pump feet are fully machined flat and parallel. Corresponding surfaces must be in
the same plane. The foundation of the unit must be a plane, machined surface. The feet
must be in the same horizontal plane to avoid warping of the unit when tightening the
connection bolts.
• Use proper ISO standard 8.8 grade or higher bolts/nuts for the connection to foundation.
All these to be tightened to the specified torques and secured by proper threadlocking
agent.
• There are M16 threaded jacking bolt holes located in each of the 4 main corners for
alignment purposes.
• Grouting agents such as Chockfast™ is generally recommended to be used to secure the
installation.
• If using shim plates, only approved and generally accepted types like Vibracon™ or
equivalent are prescribed. No general small shim plate stacks with total height over
15mm are to be used. Ensure a stable arrangement. If shims are used for height
adjustment, the shims shall cover all the foot area.
• For sidewise adjustment, brackets with adjustment bolts makes this operation easier
3.2 Coupling and alignment
Refer to FFS project specific Engineroom Arrangement drawing(s), document no.

FFS-215 Alignment and Coupling manufacturer’s documentation
• Where applicable – the selected coupling manufacturer’s alignment tolerances must be

used as basis for alignment.
• Typically, the unit is aligned by jacking screws and threaded chocks welded to the
foundation, to move the unit in the horizontal plane in all relevant directions.
• Always follow the coupling manufacturer’s instructions when fitting a coupling. Do not
apply force by sledge hammer or other excessive force that will transfer axial load onto
the bearings of the pump unit. Normal procedures for coupling hub fitting are heat,
hydraulic force, using the tapped hole in the shaft end, or a combination of these
methods.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 5 of 21
• Final alignment must be carried out after the following activities are completed:
- Fixing bolts have been correctly tightened with torque according to bolt size and
type.
- Piping has been connected and pressure tested.
- Pipe supports are carrying the loads.
- Pump has been operating until a stable bearing temperature has been reached.
- The pump support does not carry any load.
• FFS require the customer to provide alignment report before start-up and
commissioning is performed. In projects where FFS have start-up and commissioning
in their scope of supply, this information must reach FFS project department one week
prior to FFS engineer departs for this work.
• As per general industry practice, a protection cover should be fabricated over the
coupling, to prevent accidental contact of personnel or loose objects.
3.3 Piping
• Several factors related to the piping system can seriously affect the function of pump.
The piping must first of all be properly engineered regarding water velocities.
• Loads on the pump flanges arising from pipe stresses must be kept at a minimum level.
Excessive pipe stresses can deform the pump casing resulting in locked rotor. Piping
and valves shall be carefully supported. Remember that the pump is NOT a foundation
for the piping. All pipe loads must be carried by proper piping support, and piping must
be fitted so that not any pipestress can contribute to pull the unit out of alignment.
• Ensure that pipes and pump are properly cleaned before connection. Debris in the pipes
can lead to seizures and unnecessary wear. Bear in mind that some of the rotating
clearances inside the pump are only a few tenths of a mm.
• Pressure Testing of Piping - When the piping system is pressure tested, the pump is
required to be isolated to avoid damage to sealing system or other components. Keep
pump drain valve open during pressure testing. If in doubt – consult FFS. Before any
pressure testing, piping must be properly vented.
3.3.1 Suction side piping

• Correct design of the piping system is particularly important on the suction side of the
pump. Mistakes can easily result in a cavitating pump. Cavitation is caused by too low
inlet pressure, which will allow the water to ”boil” at the suction side of the impeller.
Vapour takes up space so the capacity of the pump drops dramatically. In addition
vibrations can cause serious damage to bearings, seals and the impeller. At an early
stage in most projects, FFS run a comprehensive NPSH calculation to avoid this
situation.
• Water velocities on the suction side of the pump should normally not exceed 2 meters
per second. The specific value for each case must be checked against the requirements
of the classification society or others.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 6 of 21
• The suction pipe should be as short and straight as possible. The piping must be
continuously rising towards the pump to avoid air pockets. The outlet from sea chest
should be funnel shaped. A parallel outlet has a tendency to throttle the flow.
• A suction line valve must be used for isolation only – never to throttle the flow. During
operation this valve must be fully open. Globe and angle valves should normally not be
used since these types can lead to increased suction losses. For most Fi-Fi applications
a butterfly valve is the first choice, also because of simple design and ease of operation.
• A butterfly valve must never be mounted directly to the pump’s inlet flange. The valve
disc will not be able to open fully, since it will protrude from the valve body and hit the
guide ribs in the pump casing. Always use a spool piece between pump inlet and a
butterfly valve, if a flexible bellow is not installed.
• The sea chest must have some sort of grid to prevent debris from entering the suction
line. The maximum opening in this grid shall be 30x30mm to protect the SFP pump’s
internal flow channels (Fig. 10). In some cases a strainer or filter is necessary between
sea chest and pump.
Max.
2 m/s
Grid openings
max.30x30mm
• The sea chest intake must have a sufficiently large area not to restrict the flow. The
absolute minimum flow area through the grid is two times the area of the largest
suction pipe.
• To minimise losses further, always use long radius bends and avoid sudden pipe
diameter changes.
• A provision to clean the seachest by compressed air if clogged is recommended.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 7 of 21
• A flexible bellow on the suction side of the pump is not a requirement, but this
arrangement can sometimes be useful. In this way pipe stresses caused by installation
errors or movements of the vessel is not so easily transferred to the pump. If a flexible
bellow is used, it must be located up-stream of the inlet valve in case of rupture. The
bellow should have an inside diameter corresponding to the diameter of the connected
pipe. To minimise suction losses, the inside diameter of the bellow must have a
smooth cylindrical surface.
Flexible bellow
Butterfly
valve
3.3.2 Discharge side piping
• A discharge valve is normally located in the discharge line close to the pump. There is
also a small size by-pass line for filling the piping system during start-up. A check
valve is sometimes used to prevent back-flow to the pump. This valve is only
recommended if several pumps are operating in parallel to a common manifold or ring
line. In case of check valve being used, this valve must be located up-stream of the
discharge valve.
• Acute branch angles and sudden changes in pipe diameter give unnecessary losses and
may cause noise.
• Water velocities in the discharge side of the pump should normally not exceed 4
meters per second. Check the requirements for each specific application.
• Minimum flow - Remember that all centrifugal pumps need a certain flow for self-
cooling and lubrication. This minimum flow requirement is often considered to be
about 10% of the nominal flow. See the actual pump curve for the relevant figures. A
pump likely to operate below its minimum flow rate for more than one minute, should
have a by-pass line installed. A temperature probe in the pump casing could also be
used for protection purposes.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 8 of 21
• Maximum Flow - If the pump is operating at a very low counter-pressure, the power
consumption will be high. A typical situation is too many consumers in relation to
available capacity. Excessive power consumption can result in damage to driver,
couplings or pump. Too avoid this situation consult the pump curve for the specific
application. The power consumption at a given capacty must not exeed the rating of
the system.
3.4 Electrical connections
Refer to FFS project specific wiring diagrams for electrical connections
• Wiring the unit to the control system must be done in accordance with the FFS project
specific wiring diagrams.
• The terminals are found under the cover plate on the control block, located on the left-
hand side of the unit, looking at input shaft.
• Cable gland is supplied with the unit.
3.5 Oil filling and cooling
• SFP 150x200XP requires 12 litres of ISO VG 100 transmission oil

• SFP 150x200XP(C)S requires 38-40 litres of ISO VG 100 transmission oil
• SFP 250x350XP(C) requires 38-40 litres of ISO VG 100 transmission oil
• SFP 300x400XP(C) requires 43-45 litres of ISO VG 100 transmission oil
• SFP 400x500(HD)XP(C) requires 70-73 litres of ISO VG 100 transmission oil
- Filled through the combined filling and breather plug, located on the left-hand side
of the unit, looking at input shaft or -flange. Hydraulic oil is NOT allowed.
Generally recommended oils are:

BP – Energol GR-XP 100
Castrol – Alpha SP 100
Esso – Spartan EP 100
Exxon Mobil – Mobilgear 600 XP 100
Texaco – Meropa 100
Shell – Omala 100
Gulf – GulfSea Gear oil 100
If other oiltype is wanted - Consult the relevant oil supplier for equivalent.
• Use Dipstic in the filling plug and ensure oil level is between MAX-MIN mark
measured WHEN RUNNING.
• The unit is air-cooled when the pump is not running and appr 1 kW radiant heat is
generated. Good air circulation must be ensured from the engineroom fans when the
driver of the unit is in operation.
• When the pump is running, a factory pre-installed system of directing water from the
pump through the oil cooler ensures proper cooling.
• If constant water cooling is required, see doc. FFS-361 for details.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 9 of 21
4 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
4.1 Starting the driver of the pump unit
• The driver of the pump unit may be started in pump disengaged state after the following
measures are taken:
- Compliant oil at correct quantity has been filled
- Coupling to driver of the unit (usually main engine or genset front power take-off)
is installed, aligned and tightened according to specifications.
- It is recommended that the control system of the general FiFi system is up and
running, with alarms for oil pressure and oil temperature available. However, in
practise during a vessel’s commissioning, engines are started prior to FFS engineer
attendance. It is then of vital importance that the customer representatives observe
locally on the unit that these values are within acceptable values (see points below
in this chapter)
• It is normal that the lube oil pressure will take 1-2 mins to build up on startup.
• It is of vital importance that the unit is not locally manually engaged with the suction
valve to the pump unit closed. Make sure the local engagement knob (on the side of the
control block) is in its outer position, and that ther is no indication of clutch pressure on
the relevant pressure gauge (located on the top of the control block)
• Normal lube oil pressure is 1-6 bar, depending of the speed of the driver,
temperature and oil viscocity of the unit.
• Normal, expected temperature lies in the range from 45-70 degC, depending on
ambient temperature and air circulation.
• Maximum temperature is 90 deg C, which is also the alarm setpoint. Observe that
the temperature does not rise rapidly, and not passes this value.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 10 of 21
5 OPERATION
5.1 Engaging the pump unit
• Ensure that the pump turns freely by hand. If it does not, check for foreign matter in the
pump, or pipe stresses causing the impeller to seize in the casing.
• Fill the pump casing by opening the suction valve or in rare cases through a filling pipe.
• It is strongly recommended that the pump is always engaged at idle speed of the driver
of the unit. Consult FFS for higher speed clutch-in.
• It is normal to do 1-2 local pump engagements at a typical system commissioning, to
locally verify correct clutch and lube oil pressure, as well as cooler functions (checking
that the temperature drops when water passes through the cooler). Also, typical visual
checks of main water piping not leaking at low pressures, is done here.
• Make sure the pump unit will have seawater circulation. The suction valve to the pump
and the bypass valve (around the discharge valve) on the pump’s pressure side must be
open. (For information - Refer to the project specific Piping Arrangement drawing with
FFS project number and the suffix P1).
• Never run the pump for more than 30 seconds against a completely closed discharge
valve if a by-pass line is not installed. Otherwise there is a danger of overheating and
serious damage to the pump.
• Push the knob located on the solenoid valve on the control block and twist clockwise
into its locking position seen on the base of the knob to engage the pump.
• For SFP150x200XP, SFP250x350XP(C)S, SFP250x350XP(C),

SFP400x500(HD)XP(C): Normal Clutch pressure with engaged pump are 25bar
+/-0,5bar (limits +/-3,0bar)
• For SFP300x400XP(C): Normal Clutch pressure with engaged pump are 26bar +/-
0,5bar (limits +/-3,0bar)
• Normal Lube oil pressure 1-6bar
• Observe that the both the lube and clutch pressure gauges show these correct values. It
is normal for the pressures to build up within 2 seconds.
• The pump unit can – after these verifications – be engaged remotely from control
system’s panel, typically located on the bridge of the vessel. For this operation the
control system of the general FFS system must be up and running according to
specifications, with alarms for oil pressure and oil temperature available.
• Gradually open the discharge valve until the required pumping capacity is achieved.
Rapid valve movements can sometimes cause water hammer problems.
• If the pumping capacity is significantly exceeding the duty point, it possible that motor,
couplings and pump may be overloaded. Find the capacity at duty point from the pump
curve supplied with every SFP pump.
• Run the system at duty point of the pump unit and observe that no alarms are activated
and that the project specific value of water pressure is obtained.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 11 of 21
• Check that the sound and vibration levels do not increase.

• To stop - Close the discharge valve slowly to avoid excessive pressure fluctuations.
• Stop the pump maximum 30 seconds after closing the valve to avoid overheating.
• Draining - It is strongly recommended to drain the pump casing after operation.

Flushing with fresh water is beneficial. Stagnant seawater can cause corrosion at high
temperatures often existing in an engine room. Draining connection BSP ½” for
SFP150x200 and SFP250x350XP or BSP ¾” for SFP300x400XP or BSP ½”+ ¾” for
SFP400x500XP is located in the lowest part of the pump casing for drainage purpose. A
permanently installed drain line + valve makes drainage more easy.
• ATTENTION! - Suction and discharge valves must never be closed when the
pump is running. This will lead to rapid overheating and serious damage to the
equipment.
• ATTENTION! - Pressure Transients and Fluctuations

- The SFP pump is supplied for a certain pressure rating. If this pressure is exceeded
due to pressure transients (pressure fluctuations), continued satisfactory operation
of the pump can not be guaranteed.
- Pressure transients occur if the flow in a pipe is changed. The more rapid the rate
of change, the larger the pressure fluctuation. In a long pipe even a slow rate of
change may cause a strong pressure surge.
- Starting and stopping pumps or opening and closing valves are obvious causes of
fluctuations. Any centrifugal pump should be started against a closed or partially
closed valve installed near the pump outlet. The valve must then be opened slowly.
The pump is normally stopped in the reversed order.
- Quick acting valves and long pipelines, particularly those which are inadequately
vented or gas- or airfilled, call for special attention with regards to pressure
fluctuations.
- If the power supply should fail, the pump speed suddenly drops and the flow in the
system will change in an uncontrolled way. With long pipelines the consequences
of such an interruption should be considered at the design stage.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 12 of 21
6 MAINTENANCE
6.1 Oil change
• The FFS SFP XP series requires oil change after approximately the first 300 hours of
operation – then understood under lube oil pressure = running hours of the driver of the
unit – not only with pump engaged.
• Regular intervals after this first oil change are 2500 hours.
• The oil filter must always be replaced (not attempted cleaned) at each oil change. Only
FFS original filter to be used.
• If the filter indicator, located on the control block of the unit, is showing red (>50% of
the green bar has disappeared), the oil and oil filter must be changed.
• Observe the spent oil and oil filter at every oil change for metal particles. The drain
plug (located at bottom of casing, facing FiFi pump) is also magnetic, and will collect
paricles if this is the case. If there is an excessive amount of such particles, contact FFS
for further instructions.
• Also observe the color of the spent oil and oil filter at every oil change. If this has a
grey to white appearance, water may have mixed with the transmission oil. This can
cause loss of transmission oil, insufficient lubrication and bearing damage.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 13 of 21
6.2 Oil cooler
• Every month, inspect the oil cooler, located on the left hand side of the unit, looking at
input shaft or –flange. No water remnants should be visible around fittings.
• Every month, inspect the appearance of the oil in the unit by flashlight and looking
through the sightglasses on the side of the unit.
• If the oil has a grey to white appearance, cooling water may have leaked over to the
transmission oil. The oil cooler must then be removed from the unit and pressure tested.
• Pressure testing can be performed with water (preferably) or compressed air at 12 bar,
between at the water connections at the end of the unit, or at the oil connections.
• If pressure testing reveal leakage, the oil cooler requires replacement.
NOTE: Not applicable for SFP150x200XP and some versions SFP250x300XPC

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 14 of 21
6.3 Seal Maintenance
6.3.1 SFP150x200XP, SFP 250x350XP(C), SFP 150x200XP(C)S, SFP 300x400XP(C)

• Oil tank is installed for oil lubricated cofferdam space between the pump water seal and
gearbox oil seal. This device will protect the Lipseal and will give an indication of seal
condition.
Fill oil to correct level according to decal

Use same oil as in the XP unit.
There is a drain valve placed under the

FiFi pump outlet.
If the oil level increase in the tank,
Drain for water / Oil

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 15 of 21
6.3.2 SFP 400x500(HD)XP(C)

• The pump unit is equipped with a cofferdam for drainage of oil seal and water seals
which are mounted between the FiFi pump and transmission part. The cofferdam
drainage hole is pointing straight down (“6 o`clock”).
• Every month, ensure that the hole is unclogged.
• If clogged, clean with water and mild soap and compressed air cleaning nozzle, do not
use solvents, high pressure cleaner or aggressive chemicals.
• There can be a small leakage (<1 drop/hour with pump running) in this location.
• If excessive oil leakage, consult FFS for further instructions
• If excessive water leakage, consult FFS for further instructions
• The water sealing is filled with grease from factory. Unit is equipped with grease nipple
(located on Cover beside the heat exchanger). When filling grease it is important the
sealing draining hole is open by remove the blinding plug from “Sealing draining hole”.
Fill grease until fresh grease appear out from this hole. Type of grease must be Lithium
Grease.
Plug Grease Nipple
Plug Sealing
draining hole
6.4 Cleaning
• In order to observe the state of the pump unit best possible, its exterior should be kept
clean of dust and oil.
• Do not clean the unit with high pressure washer. Use freshwater and mild solvent
(industrial degreaser/white spirit) if applicable.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 16 of 21
6.5 Testing alarm switches and gauges
• FFS recommend a yearly test of alarm switches on the unit.

• There are Minimess™ test points for Lube oil and Clutch oil on the control block. To
isolate the circuits for test by hand pump, close the needle valves in front of the relevant
test point. Observe the relevant gauge (Lube oil or Clutch oil), in combination with
measuring with a suitable el. Testing tool/multimeter with its Ohm/ring-out function.
• On electrical terminal strip:
- Lube oil alarm – Terminals 3 and 4
- Clutch oil alarm – Terminals 7 and 8
• The contacts are Normally Closed, alarm by open contact. Increase the pressure over
alarm point, and observe that the contact opens on falling pressure at the correct
setpoint.
• Lube oil alarm setpoint is 1 bar
• For SFP150x200XP, SFP150x200XP(C)S SFP250x350XP, SFP400x500XP: Clutch
oil alarm setpoint is 22 bar
• For SFP300x400XP: Clutch oil alarm setpoint is 23 bar
• If needed, the pressure switches can be adjusted by the center screw of the relevant
pressure switch, located on right-hand side wall of recess in the control block, under the
cover plate.
• The temp switch (located at bottom inside recess in the control block, under the cover
plate) is best tested taken out of the unit, and placing it in water with controlled
temperature with proper thermometer. Contact to open on increasing temperature.
• Temperature alarm setpoint is 90 deg C
• The temperature switches can not be adjusted, and if the value deviates over 5 deg C, a
new unit must be ordered from FFS.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 17 of 21
6.6 Adjusting Lube and Clutch oil pressures
• FFS have delivered the unit with pre-set pressures for Lube oil and Clutch oil –
normally there is no need to adjust these settings.
• Do not adjust these settings unless the operation of the unit is abnormal.
• On the control block, under the clutch solenoid valve, there is an adjustment screw
where the Clutch oil pressure can be adjusted.
• With the driver of the unit running in full speed (=normal speed for running the FiFi
system at pump’s duty point) – adjust the clutch oil pressure to specified setting (Ref.
5.1).
• With the driver of the unit running idle, with proper clutch in procedures (suction valve
open, discharge valve closed, bypass valve open – Ref. 5.1 )– engage the pump locally
by the local engagement knob and check clutch pressure to be within specification(Ref.
5.1).
• Setting for Lube oil pressure is not to be adjusted.

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 18 of 21
6.7 Maintenance table
Measure Intervals Remarks

Monitor the unit by the Continously Low Lube oil pressure
control system, check for during start-up is normal,
abnormal noises and will build up within 1-2
minutes. This also serves as
a test of the Lube oil
pressure alarm, every time
the driver of the unit
(usually main engine) is
stopped and then re-started.
Seal inspection Every month Check combined oil level
and temperature gauge –
Ref. 6.3.
Check oil level Every 2 months Check combined oil level
and temperature gauge –
Ref. 6.1.
Initial oil change After approximately 300 hours Understood under lube oil
pressure = running hours of
the driver of the unit – not
only with pump engaged.
Filter also to be replaced. –
Ref. 6.1
Regular oil changes Every 2500 engine hours or every year Filter also to be replaced –
what comes first Ref. 6.1.
Oil sample analysis Every 20 000 operating hours / 8th oil Submit sample to proper
change / maximum 5 years approved instances.
Fill/Vent screw cleaning Whenever clogged – Ref. 6.3
Main housing cleaning Whenever too dirty to properly observe Do not use high pressure
any leakages washer – Ref. 6.4
Pressure and temperature Every 12 months Ref. 6.4
switch test
For SFP 400x500XP : Every 24 months Lithium Grease
Re-grease pump seal by Ref. 6.3.2
outside connection.
Full overhaul Every 5 years, typically together with Recommend to use FFS
planned dry docking and engine certified service engineer
overhaul. and original FFS parts.
Change Lipseal oil Change at same interval as regular oil
change
Drain Lipseal drain-valve Check every month Check oil level in tank and
drain if above max

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 19 of 21
6.8 Troubleshooting table
Problem Possible Cause Remedy

Abnormal noise in pump Excessive bearing clearances Report symptoms to FFS
disengaged state Defective bearing(s) for further instructions.
Damage to teeth on internal wheel(s)
Loosened mounting Re-align unit and tighten

bolts to specifications –
Ref. 3.2
Operating temperature Oil level too high Check and correct oil level
above alarm setpoint if necessary – Ref. 6.1
in pump engaged mode:
Excessively worn/dirty oil Check time of last oil
change – change oil if
necessary – Ref. 6.1
Clogged cooler Check oil cooler – Ref. 6.2

Renew if necessary
Alignment tolerances surpassed Check alignment – Ref. 3.2

Operating temperature Air circulation Ensure that air is flowing
above alarm setpoint and not stagnant around the
in pump disengaged pump unit.
mode:
Oil level too high Check and correct oil level
if necessary – Ref. 6.1
Excessively worn/dirty oil Check time of last oil

change – change oil if
necessary – Ref. 6.1
Alignment tolerances surpassed Check alignment – Ref. 3.2

Insufficient Lube oil or Factory set adjustments have went out of Adjust oil pressure –Ref.
Clutch oil pressure range 6.6.
If problem persists – Report
symptoms to FFS for
further instructions.
Internal leakages in Lube oil or Clutch Report symptoms to FFS

oil system for further instructions.
Oil leakage Shaft seals defective or fittings loose or Check and troubleshoot for
defective leakages on pump unit. Ref
6.3.
Report symptoms to FFS

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 20 of 21
Troubleshooting table continued:
Oil contaminated with Oil has been mixed with water Check and troubleshoot for
grey to white leakages on pump unit. Ref
discoloration 6.1-3. Also, condensation
may have caused this.
Oil contaminated with Clutch, bearings or inner wheels Report symptoms to FFS
metal particles defective for further instructions.
Water leakage Shaft seal of pump defective Check and troubleshoot for
leakages on pump unit. Ref
Seals of pump defective 6.3.
Report symptoms to FFS
Inadequate Pump Wrong direction of rotation Check rotation – Ref 3.1
Capacity
Air in the pump inlet, due to air Check piping – Ref 3.3
pockets or leaks in suction
Bad design of suction piping causing Check piping – Ref 3.3

cavitation
Suction lift too high Check piping – Ref 3.3
Impeller wear ring clearance too large Report symptoms to FFS

Friction losses in suction or discharge Check piping – Ref 3.3

piping too large
Debris clogging seachest or strainer Check piping – Ref 3.3

Clean if necessary.
Vibrations in pump unit Solids trapped in impeller Check piping – Ref 3.3
Clean if necessary.
Pump unit inadequately secured Check installation – Ref 3.1
Misalignment Check installation – Ref 3.2
Faulty inlet conditions Check piping – Ref 3.3
Over-throttling, i.e. the flow is too small Check operation – Ref 5.1
Cavitation Check operation – Ref 5.1

Check piping – Ref 3.3
Change in oil level for lip Water appear when draining -Leakage in Check Lip Seal – Ref 6.3.1
seal oil tank lipseal for fifi pump
Oil level increase and no water when Check Simmering – Ref
draining – Leakage in simmering for 6.3.1
gear box

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Doc.no.: FFS-352
Rev. 19
Page 21 of 21
6.9 Spare parts and Service
• FFS recommend to continuously keep a spare parts stock of the following consumable
items per pump unit:
- Transmission oil within specifications – Ref. 3.5
- 1 Oil filter
• Other spare parts are available on request. FFS can be contacted at the footer address of
this document for these and other spare parts if applicable.
• The FFS Group has a golobal agents and contact network – accessible from the FFS
web pages at: www.fifisystems.com

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
9 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
Input Coupling Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
Shipowner: Mark Marine & Investments - FZCO
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 09

CONTENTS
Item No: Qty Type Description Location Sheet No
09 1 CentaMax-B Flexible Coupling to Engine Stbd 2
09A Rev Date: 07/03/2023
Input Coupling Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 2
ITEM NO. 09 CM-2400-BBEW Stbd

General information
Quantity 1
Coupling series BBEW
Coupling type CentaMax-B
Manufacturer Centa
Technical data
Rubber element 2400-BBEW-60shore hardness
Nominal Torque 2500 Nm
Maximum Torque 3750 Nm
Maximum Speed 1800 rpm
Flexible elements 1
Weight 33 kg
Coupling information Engine side Pump side ( SFP 150x200 XP )

Massmoment of inertia 0.028 kgm2 0.308 kgm2
Connection / hub bore bore Ø100 max bore Ø60 K6
Keyway keyway 18 H9 x 4.4 +0.2, to DIN 6885
Material
Hub Steel
Ring / Flange Steel /w series of single bolted bushes
Flexible element Rubber
Documentation
Type Approval NA
Approval NA
Dimensional drawing FE-004B-60030
Assembly drawing w/partslist FE-004B-60030
Instruction manual CM-800…18000-SCEW
Data sheet Centamax-B
Ψ
Transmissions
Far East Pte. Ltd
CENTA
²
²
Written by: HMP Rev.00
Document no: FFS543_00
Shrink fitted
Keyed Coupling hub
This instruction is a guideline for correct assembly/disassembly of shrink fitted coupling hub to
keyed shaft. Make sure the detail drawing of the coupling is available as typically shown below.
Note that in some cases, one half of the coupling may have another connection to transfer the
torque, eg. by conical or cylindrical execution without key, then typically with oil grooves. Refer
then to respective FFS guidelines, available on request.
Typical drawing 1: Flexible coupling - Hubs with keyway shown (near centreline) on both
sides of coupling’s rubber element
Typical drawing 2: Tooth (Geared) coupling - Hubs with keyway shown on both sides of
connection face

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 1 of 2
Written by: HMP Rev.00
Document no: FFS543_00
PROCEDURE FOR ASSEMBLY (one hub described, identical for other side if key on both
halves):
1. Check and confirm that shaft, key and hub are free for scratches.
2. Ensure that no oil grooves in the hub or in the shaft.
3. Ensure keyway in the hub and shaft, and that shaft is fitted.
4. Use a micrometer and measure shaft diameter and hub diameter. Check that shaft and hub
are within the tolerances. Make sure the mating parts have equal temperatures during this
measurement.
5. Locate the key in the shaft’s keyway, after checking for a snug fit by hand in hub keyway.
The fit in the shaft is to be somewhat tighter, and careful tapping with a small hammer to
place it in complete contact with the keyway might be necessary.
6. If any set screw(s) in the hub over the key, extract these so they don’t protrude into the
keyway.
7. Heat the hub. Make sure to remove rubber element(s) (if flexible coupling), O-ring/dust
seal (if tooth coupling) and any other non-metallic coupling parts which might be damaged
by heat >100deg C) to obtain clearance. Methods can be induction heater, hot plate, gas
flame* or oil bath. NOTE – if using gas flame on geared coupling – take care over the
geared section, since excessive heat may damage the teeth’s hardening layer.
8. Within practical limits, try to achive needed expansion seen from point 4 above. Thermal
extension ratio for shaft diameter Ø100mm and temperature difference 100 deg C gives
0,1mm (Ø100 and 10deg C gives 0,01mm). Max heating temperature 300deg C, (ref.
coupling drawing).
9. If tooth coupling, make sure that the outer sleeve (ref. project specific drawing) is located
onto the shaft before mounting the heated hub.
10. Assemble the hub quickly on the shaft to correct position. Ensure to have a jack tool ready
prepared if necessary to pull on the hub.
11. Allow the hub to cool down until it settles in its correct position with the shrink fit and
ensure it is not loose.
12. If any set screw(s) in the hub over the key, tighten these to proper specification.
PROCEDURE FOR DISASSEMBLY (one hub described, identical for other side if key on both
halves):
1. Remove the rubber element(s) (if flexible coupling), O-ring/dust seal (if tooth coupling)
and any other non-metallic coupling parts which might be damaged by heat >100deg C.
2. If any set screw(s) in the hub over the key, loosen these from any contact with the key.
3. Prepare a jack tool for pulling off the hub, eg. by threaded or hydraulic principle.
4. By gas flame* or other suitable means, heat the hub rapidly, and avoid heat to travel to the
shaft, so mostly the hub expands. NOTE – if using gas flame on geared coupling – take
care over the geared section, since excessive heat may damage the teeth’s hardening layer.
5. Gradually increase pull pressure by the jack tool until the hub starts slipping.
6. Pull off the hub by means of the jack tool, and attempt to do so in one constant motion to
avoid the hub seizing before fully released.
* Regarding gas flame, oxy-acetylene with relatively large and powerful heat bend attachment is
the recommended tool, opposed to propane/butane burner, which might be too weak. Do not use
cutting flame by oxygen addition, as this may damage the hub and/or tooth coupling geared
section.

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 2 of 2
POWER TRANSMISSION
LEADING BY INNOVATION
CENTAMAX-B
®
TORSIONALLY SOFT COUPLINGS WITH PRECOMPRESSION FOR

INDEPENDENTLY MOUNTED UNITS ON RIGID OR SOFT MOUNTS
WWW.CENTA.INFO/CM-B
CATALOG CM-B-E-06-04
®
-B
M AX
A
NT
CE
For many years we have been supplying the „plug in“ Important characteristics and advantages:
type CENTAMAX series S for flange mounted drives. This • torsionally very soft, precompressed, free of backlash
series is described in detail in our catalog CM-S. • linear stiffness characteristic
In this leaflet we describe the CENTAMAX series B, • torsional stiffness can be adjusted by choice of different
which adds a further interesting series for indepen- shore hardness discs
dently mounted drives. We have delivered many such
• damps vibrations and shocks, compensates all kinds of
couplings over the years.
misalignments
The outstanding technical advantage is the precom-
• temperature resistant rubber, good heat dissipation due
pression between the input flange and the rubber disc,
to ventilation all over the disc
which makes it free of backlash. The CENTAMAX-B is the
only one of its kind of design with this feature. • suitable for high speeds, accepts large bores in the
hubs
The input flange is not made as a toothed cast alumi-
nium ring, but as a steel plate with a series of single • no wearing parts, reliable long life, no maintenance
bolted steel bushes, which engage with the teeth of the • compact short design – input flange to SAE J620 or with
rubber disc under substantial precompression. hub for the connection of 2 shafts
Due to this backlash free, precompressed connection, • simple, easy assembly, radial exchange of the element
the couplings are much more resistant to wear due • available with or without fail safe device
to misalignment or torsional vibration especially when
under low or no load conditions.
Typical areas of application:
Furthermore the flexible element can be exchanged
nonflanged, independently mounted units for main pro-
without disturbing the coupled shafts.
pulsion or auxiliary drives, such as gensets, pumps, com-
The CENTAMAX-B series are available for flywheel to pressors and all kinds of front P.T.0.
shaft or shaft to shaft applications.
The units can be mounted either on flexible or rigid
mounts.
CM-B-2 CENTA Power Transmission leading by innovation

®
-B
MAX
A
NT
CE
Technical data
Centamax Shore Nominal Max. Continuous Vibr. Allowable Dyn. Torsional

Size Hardness Torque Torque Torque at 10Hz Energy Loss Stiffness
Shore TKN TKmax TKW PKV CTdyn

A [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [W] [Nm/rad]
50 700 1400 280 2800
800-B 60 850 1700 340 105 4200
70 950 2000 380 6800
50 1000 2000 400 4500
1200-B 60 1200 2400 480 150 7000
70 1300 3000 520 11700
50 1450 2900 580 6000
1600-B 60 1800 3600 720 220 9000
70 2000 4000 800 15000
50 2000 4000 800 10000
2400-B 60 2500 5000 1000 300 15000
70 2800 6000 1120 25000
50 2500 5000 1000 9000
2600-B 60 2700 6000 1080 350 12500
70 3000 7000 1200 20000
50 2800 6000 1120 25000
2800-B 60 3000 7500 1200 360 37500
70 3200 8000 1280 63000
50 3200 6500 1280 16000
3500-B 60 3500 8000 1400 450 24000
70 3800 8500 1520 38000
50 4000 8000 1600 34000
4000-B 60 4500 11000 1800 500 50000
70 5000 12500 2000 80000
50 4500 9000 1800 17000
5000-B 60 5000 10000 2000 500 27000
70 6000 12000 2400 45000
50 5400 11000 2160 28000
6000-B 60 6000 12000 2400 750 43000
70 7000 15000 2800 77000
50 8000 16000 3200 60000
8000-B 60 9000 22000 3600 1000 80000
70 10000 25000 4000 130000
50 12500 25000 5000 79000
12000-B 60 14000 28000 5600 1500 115000
70 15000 30000 6000 188000
Typical application samples of CENTAMAX-B
Five Humber tugs are successfully using CENTAMAX-B to drive fire fight- CENTAMAX-B for main propulsion bet-
ing pumps from the front PTO of the Diesel engine. ween Diesel engine on soft mounts and
marine gear on rigid mounts.

®
-B
M AX
A
NT
CE
Dimensions, masses
Mass moments of inertia without fail safe device
design „A“ design „B“

Centamax SAE
design A B C d1 d3 E L L1 N1 J [kgm2] m [kg]
Size J620
min max primary secondary primary secondary
11½ 0,334 17,3

800 BBE A 87 15 150±2 20 65 326 64 130 66 100 0,028 9,3
14 0,705 26,1
11½ 0,338 17,5
1200 BBE A 87 15 150±2 20 65 326 64 130 66 100 0,051 12,2
14 0,708 26,2
14 0,933 28,1
1600 BBE A 16 87 15 188±2 30 100 425 88 168 90 140 1,214 0,106 32,7 19,8
18 1,618 38,1
14 0,947 28,4
2400 BBE A 16 87 15 188±2 30 100 425 88 168 90 140 1,227 0,155 33,1 23,8
18 1,631 38,5
14 1,056 27,9
2600 BCE B 16 98 15 212±2 35 105 454,5 103 183 105 154 1,337 0,201 32,5 27,4
18 1,741 37,9
14 0,916 26,3
2800 BCE B 16 87 15 188±2 35 105 425 103 158 105 154 1,197 0,218 30,9 26,2
18 1,601 36,3
14 1,076 28,7
3500 BCE B 16 98 15 212±2 35 105 454,5 103 183 105 154 1,357 0,221 33,3 28,2
18 1,761 38,7
14 0,948 23,8
4000 BCE B 16 85 15 212±2 50 140 454,5 125 190 125 210 1,228 0,445 28,4 44,6
18 1,632 33,9
14 1,177 30,2
5000 BCE B 16 111 15 227±2 35 105 454,5 103 198 105 154 1,468 0,223 34,8 31,1
18 1,862 40,2
18 1,938 37,9
6000 BCE B 98 15 232±2 50 140 544 123 208 125 210 0,613 51,9
21 3,078 49,6
18 2,805 47,1
8000 BCE B 21 111 18 265±1 70 170 576 151 236 150 235 4,325 1,058 62,6 70,5
24 5,621 73,1
18 167 31 372±2 664 7,724 108
12000 BCE B 21 157 21 362±2 70 170 658 201 331 200 235 7,082 1,711 93,5 106
24 157 21 362±2 658 8,454 104
Dimensions to SAE J 620 Order Code

SAE CM - 8000 - BCE - 60 - 21
DA DT Z S
J620
SAE size
11½ 352,4 333,4 8 x 45° 11
Shore hardness
14 466,7 438,2 8 x 45° 13
B= series
16 517,5 489,0 8 x 45° 13 series C= hub series
E= element radially
18 571,5 542,9 6 x 60° 17 exchangeable
21 673,1 641,4 12 x 30° 17 size
24 733,4 692,2 12 x 30° 19 CENTAMAX series

®
-B
MAX
A
NT
CE
Dimensions, masses
Mass moments of inertia with fail safe device
design „C“ design „D“

Centamax SAE
design A B C d1 d3 E F L1 N1 J [kgm2] m [kg]
size J620
11½ 0,334 17,3

800 BFE C 87 15 184±2 20 65 326 98 20 80 100 0,039 14,4
14 0,705 26,1
11½ 0,338 17,5
1200 BFE C 87 15 184±2 20 65 326 98 20 80 100 0,063 17,4
14 0,708 26,2
14 0,933 28,1
1600 BFE C 16 87 15 208±2 30 100 425 108 20 90 140 1,214 0,149 32,7 28,5
18 1,618 38,1
14 0,947 28,4
2400 BFE C 16 87 15 208±2 30 100 425 108 20 90 140 1,227 0,194 33,1 32,5
18 1,631 38,5
14 1,056 27,9
2600 BFE D 16 98 15 250±2 35 105 454,5 148 20 130 154 1,337 0,209 32,5 30,5
18 1,741 37,9
14 0,916 26,3
2800 BFE D 16 87 15 233±2 35 105 425 148 20 130 154 1,197 0,269 30,9 34,5
18 1,601 36,3
14 1,047 28,7
3500 BFE D 16 98 15 250±2 35 105 454,5 148 20 130 154 1,328 0,289 33,3 35,4
18 1,732 38,7
14 0,948 23,8
4000 BFE D 16 85 15 232±2 50 140 454,5 145 20 125 210 1,228 0,544 28,4 51,9
18 1,632 33,9
14 1,177 30,2
5000 BFE D 16 111 15 265±2 35 105 454,5 148 20 130 154 1,468 0,229 34,8 34,2
18 1,862 40,2
18 1,938 37,9
6000 BFE D 98 15 267±2 50 140 544 143 20 125 210 0,712 59,2
21 3,078 49,6
18 2,805 47,1
8000 BFE D 21 111 18 290±1 70 170 576 176 25 150 235 4,325 1,281 62,6 82,9
24 5,621 73,1
18 167 31 400±2 664 7,724 108
12000 BFE D 21 157 21 390±2 70 170 658 229 28 200 235 7,082 2,011 93,5 126
24 157 21 390±2 658 8,454 104
Order Code
CM - 8000 - BFE - 60 - 21 Without any details being given the hubs will be
delivered prebored. All detail data, dimensions and
SAE size
information in this catalog is given without
Shore hardness guarantee. We reserve the right to make amend-
B= series ments and improvements without notice. This catalog
series F= fail safe supersedes all previous catalogs and data sheets.
E= element radially
exchangeable
This technical document has legal protection in
accordance with DIN 34.
size
CENTAMAX series

®
-B
MAX
A
NT
CE
Shaft to shaft types,
for radial change of element
Series BBEW
Series BCEW
primary secondary
CENTAMAX
A C d1/d2 d3 E1 E2 L1/L2 N1/N2 X J [kgm2] m [kg]
size
800 BBEW 87 214±2 20 65 330 64 64 66 100 69 0,303 0,028 21 9

1200 BBEW 87 214±2 20 65 330 64 64 66 100 69 0,307 0,051 22 12
1600 BBEW 87 276±2 30 100 430 88 88 90 140 83 0,821 0,106 38 19
2400 BBEW 87 276±2 30 100 430 88 88 90 140 83 0,835 0,155 39 23
2600 BCEW 99 316±2 35 105 458 103 103 105 154 88 1,166 0,201 49 27
2800 BCEW 88 294±2 35 105 430 103 103 105 154 66 0,919 0,218 44 26
3500 BCEW 99 316±2 35 105 458 103 103 105 154 88 1,186 0,221 50 28
4000 BCEW 86 336±2 50 140 458 125 123 125 210 68 1,252 0,445 62 44
5000 BCEW 112 330±2 35 105 458 103 103 105 154 102 1,287 0,223 53 31
6000 BCEW 99 356±2 50 140 548 123 123 125 210 88 2,203 0,613 76 51
8000 BCEW 113 414±2 70 170 578 151 148 150 235 96 3,411 1,058 104 70
12000 BCEW 157 560±2 70 170 665 201 198 200 235 137 7,545 1,711 164 106
X = min. space between the shaft ends for radial change of the rubber element.
Alignment of Coupling
The alignment of free mounted, nonflanged drives should nent set. In addition, the rigidly mounted driven unit
be checked in the usual way, f.i. by checking the radial should be placed about 0,3 mm lower than the flexibly
and angular misalignment between driving and driven mounted engine. In this way, upon further settling of the
side with a dial indicator. engine a misalignment improvement can be achieved and
As reference surface the inner hub should be used on one the engines position after some running time will not be
side and a machined surface of the flywheel or of the fly- essentially lower than the driven unit. Further settling of
wheel flange of the coupling or a hub on the other side. the engine is thus anticipated and compensated if neces-
If the engine is placed on flexible mounts, then the align- sary.
ment should be checked at the earliest 2 days after the The alignment of flexibly mounted engines should be
engine has been put on its flexible mounts, because only checked periodically.
then will these mounts have taken most of their perma-
Misalignment Permissible angular and parallel

Since radial and angular misalign-
ments cause continuous flexing of the
offset misalignment is dependant
rubber disc, it is advisable to keep the
radial upon the speed when utilizing the
The couplings can accomodate alignment as low as possible — bet-
nominal torque capacity.
the following maximum misa- ter than above values — in order to
lignment: ensure long coupling life and smooth
Axial: several mm (as running. For non flanged drives we
stated in dimension recommend following effective range
axial tables) of max. misalignment:
n min-1
angular: 0,2 degrees / radial: 0,5 mm

Angular: 0,5 degrees Above values are for continuous duty.
Radial: 1,0 mm For short time (f.i. during starting and
stopping the engine, at heavy sea,
These values for angular and etc.) up to five times higher values
radial misalignment are based for radial and angular misalignment
angular
on 1500 rpm. For other speeds are allowable.
convert according the following Furthermore we offer the CENTAX-SEC range of couplings which easily com-
diagram. pensate considerable misalignments without wear in the torque range up to
160 KNm.
Make use of our extensive experience and counsel for critical application.

®
-B
M AX
A
NT
CE
Fitting instructions
TA2 Tightening torque of bolts on flywheel flange– Types: BBE, BCE

SAE 11½ 14 16 18 21 24
Metric bolts M10 M12 M12 M16 M16 M18
8.8 TA2 [Nm] 46 79 79 195 195 245
Inch bolts 3/8 – 16 ½ – 13 ½ – 13 5/8 – 11 5/8 – 11 ¾ – 10
[Nm] 42 102 102 203 203 366
TA2
[inch-lbs.] 372 903 903 1797 1797 3240
These bolts are not included
TA3 Tightening torque of bolts on inner hub – Types: BBE, BCE, BBEW, BCEW
2600 B 4000 B
coupling size 800 B 1600 B
2800 B 5000 B 8000 B 12000 B
1200 B 2400 B
3500 B 6000 B
bolts M 10 M 12 M 16 M 16 M 20 M 20
ISO 4762 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9
tightening torque
TA3 [Nm] 68 117 280 280 490 490
quantity 16 16 8 12 12 24
TA4 Tightening torque of bolts on flange – Types: BBE, BCE, BBEW, BCEW
1600 B 2600 B
coupling size 800 B
2400 B 3500 B 4000 B 5000 B 8000 B 12000 B
1200 B
2800 B 6000 B
bolts M 10x70 M 10x70 M 12x80 M 12x70 M 12x95 M 14x90 M 16x140
ISO 4762 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 8.8
tightening torque
TA4 [Nm] 68 68 117 117 117 185 195
quantity 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
At first the output hub of the coupling is mounted onto driver) and to press the next bush down with this tool
the driven shaft and the flywheel flange is mounted to the until the relevant bolt is tightened. Then always use the
flywheel (tightening torque TA2). previously assembled adjacent bush as support in order
Then the driven unit is put in its final position and aligned to press down the next bush.
to the driving unit. Next step is the assembly of the rub- In order to avoid too much temporary radial load on the
ber disc to the output hub (tightening torque TA3). Finally coupled shafts during assembly, we recommed tightening
the single bushes are bolted to the flywheel flange (TA4). alternate bolts 180° opposite to the previously tightened
To achieve the desired precompression a substantial bolt.
radial force must be exerted to the single bush in order to After this procedure, the coupling is free of radial and
press it radially into its final position. We recommend as a axial forces, if it is well aligned. Also the transmitted
first step to screw only one bolt without bushes and then torque does not create any reacting force. Only misalign-
to use this bolt as a support for a tool (e.g. large screw ments will cause relevant reacting forces.

C e n ta P OW E R T R A N S MI S SIO N
leading by innovation
CENTA is the leading producer of flexible couplings for industrial,

marine and power generating applications. Worldwide.
A family business with headquarters in Haan, Germany
Subsidiaries in 10 major industrial countries.

Agencies in 25 other countries.
Worldwide after-sales service with combined forces of over 400 staff.
Our success: over 15 million CENTA couplings installed since 1970.
Head oFFiCe WoRld Wide netWoRk
CENTA Antriebe Australia Finland Japan Slovakia

Kirschey GmbH Austria France Jordan South Africa
Belgium Germany Mexico South Korea
Bergische Strasse 7 Bulgaria Great Britain Netherlands Spain
42781 Haan/Germany Brazil Greece New Zealand Sweden
Canada Hong Kong Norway Switzerland
+49-2129-9120 Phone
Chile Hungary Peru Taiwan
+49-2129-2790 Fax
China India Poland Turkey
info@centa.de Czech Republic Israel Portugal USA
www.centa.info Denmark Italy Singapore
CENTA headoffice and subsidiaries are marked with the CENTA logo.
Find our world wide address database at www.centa.info/contact

CENTAMAX-Coupling
Assembly and operating instructions
CM-800…18000-SCEW
M04-005-EN
Rev. 1
Assembly and operating instructions M04-005-EN
CENTAMAX-Coupling Rev. 1
CM-800…18000-SCEW
Contents
1 General remarks ..................................................................................... 5
2 Safety ..................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Safety remarks................................................................................. 6
2.1.1 Signal words......................................................................... 6
2.1.2 Pictograms ........................................................................... 7
2.2 Qualification of deployed personnel ..................................................... 7
2.3 Intended application.......................................................................... 7
2.4 Application not in compliance with the intended use............................... 9
3 Delivery, transport, storage and disposal ............................................. 10

3.1 Delivery......................................................................................... 10
3.2 Transport....................................................................................... 10
3.3 Storage ......................................................................................... 10
3.3.1 Storage location .................................................................. 11
3.3.2 Storage of couplings / flexible elements.................................. 11
3.4 Disposal ........................................................................................ 11
4 Technical description ............................................................................ 12

4.1 Characteristics................................................................................ 12
4.2 Specifications ................................................................................. 12
5 Alignment of the units being connected................................................ 13

5.1 Axial alignment............................................................................... 13
5.2 Radial alignment............................................................................. 14
5.3 Angular alignment........................................................................... 15
6 Mounting .............................................................................................. 16
6.1 General assembly instructions .......................................................... 16
6.2 Mounting the hub............................................................................ 18
6.2.1 Mounting the hub with feather key......................................... 18
6.2.2 Mounting the hub with conical oil interference fit...................... 20
6.3 Aligning the units............................................................................ 22
6.4 Mounting the flange ........................................................................ 23
6.5 Mounting the rubber element............................................................ 24
6.6 Mounting the bushes ....................................................................... 25
6.7 After completed mounting ................................................................ 26
7 Operation.............................................................................................. 27
7.1 Operating faults, root causes and remedy........................................... 27
7.2 Admissible overall misalignment of the coupling .................................. 28
CENTA Antriebe Kirschey GmbH 2 / 36

CM-800…18000-SCEW
8 Care and maintenance .......................................................................... 29

8.1 Work to be performed ..................................................................... 29
8.1.1 Cleaning the coupling........................................................... 29
8.1.2 Visual inspection of the coupling............................................ 29
8.1.3 Visual inspection of the rubber elements................................. 29
8.1.4 Inspection of the screw connections ....................................... 30
8.2 Replacing defective parts ................................................................. 30
9 Dismantling .......................................................................................... 31
9.1 General dismantling instructions ....................................................... 31
9.2 Dismantling the coupling.................................................................. 32
9.2.1 Dismantling the bushes ........................................................ 32
9.2.2 Dismantling the rubber element ............................................ 32
9.2.3 Dismantling the flange (if necessary) ..................................... 32
9.2.4 Disconnecting the driving and driven units (if necessary) .......... 32
9.3 Dismantling the hub (if necessary) .................................................... 32
9.3.1 Dismantling the hub with feather key (if necessary) ................. 32
9.3.2 Dismantling the hub with conical oil interference fit (if
necessary) ......................................................................... 33
9.4 Reassembling the coupling ............................................................... 34
10 Wearing and spare parts....................................................................... 35
11 Annex ................................................................................................... 36
11.1 CENTA data sheet D13-016 (unlubricated screw connections)................ 36

CM-800…18000-SCEW
Index of illustrations
Fig. 5-1 Axial misalignment...................................................................... 13
Fig. 5-2 Radial misalignment .................................................................... 14
Fig. 5-3 Angular misalignment.................................................................. 15
Fig. 6-1 Mounting the hub........................................................................ 19
Fig. 6-2 Mounting the hub with conical oil interference fit ............................. 20
Fig. 6-3 Mounting the flange .................................................................... 23
Fig. 6-4 Mounting the rubber element........................................................ 24
Fig. 6-5 Mounting the bushes ................................................................... 25
Fig. 8-1 Visual inspection at the rubber elements ........................................ 30
Index of tables
Table 2-1 Shape and size of ventilation holes................................................ 8
Table 6-1 Tightening torques for threaded pins ........................................... 19
Table 7-1 Troubleshooting table................................................................ 27
Index of formulas
Formula 5-1 Calculated dimension SW ........................................................ 15

CM-800…18000-SCEW
1 General remarks
These assembly and operating instructions form a constituent part of the
coupling delivery and must be kept in an easily accessible place at all times.
CENTA products are developed and produced to quality standard

DIN EN ISO 9001:2000.
In the interests of further development, CENTA reserves the right to make

technical changes.
IMPORTANT
CENTA is unable to accept liability for damage and operating faults caused by failure to
observe the operating instructions.
These operating instructions are protected under copyright to CENTA Antriebe

Kirschey GmbH.
In case of technical questions, please enquire with our head office:
CENTA Antriebe
Kirschey GmbH
Bergische Strasse 7
42781 Haan
GERMANY
Phone +49-2129-912-0
Fax +49-2129-2790
centa@centa.de
www.centa.info

CM-800…18000-SCEW
2 Safety
The purpose of these operating instructions is to enable users to:
use the coupling safely and correctly
maximize efficiency
ensure that care and maintenance are carried out correctly
For this reason, these operating instructions must be thoroughly read and
understood prior to work on and with the coupling.
WARNING
Injury and material damage can occur as a result of:
Failure to adhere to the safety and accident prevention regulations
valid at the relevant installation site
The safety and accident prevention regulations valid at the installation
site in question must be adhered to when performing any of the tasks
described in these operating instructions.
2.1 Safety remarks

In these operating instructions, safety remarks are indicated by a pictogram and
a signal word.
2.1.1 Signal words

The following signal words are used in the safety remarks:
Denotes the immediate threat of danger.

DANGER If not prevented, fatal or extremely serious injuries can result.
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation.

WARNING If not prevented, fatal or extremely serious injuries can result.
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation.

CAUTION If not prevented, minor injuries and/damage to property may result.
Denotes application tips and particularly useful information. This is not

IMPORTANT a signal word denoting a dangerous or damaging situation.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
2.1.2 Pictograms
Possible pictograms in the safety precautions:
Warning of a hazardous area
Do not switch
Use protective gloves
Use protective goggles
2.2 Qualification of deployed personnel

All the work described in these operating instructions may only be performed by
authorized persons with adequate training and instruction.
WARNING
Work at the coupling which is not described in these instructions
Only carry out work which is described in these operating instructions.
2.3 Intended application
WARNING
Application not in compliance with the intended use
The couplings are intended exclusively for use in accordance with the
relevant design. They may only be used under the specified conditions.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
WARNING
Injuries can occur as a result of:
Contact with rotating parts
Shield the coupling in accordance with the applicable accident
prevention regulations with an enclosure.
Exception:
The coupling is encased by the driving and driven units.
The scope of delivery provided by CENTA does not include a protective

enclosure.
This enclosure must fulfil the following criteria:

Provide protection against persons gaining access to rotating parts
Restrain any rotating parts which may be work loose
Guarantee sufficient ventilation for the coupling
This enclosure must be made of stable steel components. In order to ensure

adequate ventilation for the coupling, the enclosure must be fitted with regular
openings. For safety reasons, these openings must not exceed the dimensions
outlined in table 2-1.
Component Circular openings Rectangular openings

[mm] [mm]
Top of the enclosure Ø8 8
Side elements of the Ø8 8

enclosure
Table 2-1 Shape and size of ventilation holes
The enclosures must be positioned a minimum of 15 mm distant from rotating

parts. The enclosure must be electrically conductive and be included in the
equipotential bonding.
Before commencing long-term operation, the plant must successfully complete a

test run.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
2.4 Application not in compliance with the intended use
WARNING
Inadmissibly high torque
Inadmissibly high or low speeds
Exceeding the specified ambient temperature
Inadmissible ambient medium
Inadmissible coupling enclosure
Exceeding the admissible overall misalignment values
Only use the coupling for the specified application.
CENTA bears no liability for damage resulting from application not in compliance
with the intended use of the equipment.
Should there be a change of plant parameters, the coupling design must be
reviewed by CENTA (address see chapter 1).

CM-800…18000-SCEW
3 Delivery, transport, storage and disposal

3.1 Delivery
After delivery, the coupling:
must be checked for completeness and correctness of the delivery.
must be examined for possible transport damage (which must be reported
immediately to the carrier).
3.2 Transport
CAUTION
Incorrect transportation of couplings
Ensure that the coupling is correctly transported.
CAUTION
Material damage to coupling components can occur as a result
of:
Contact with sharp-edged objects
Protect coupling components for transportation.
Only hoist coupling components with nylon belts or ropes.
Always cushion parts when supporting them from below.
Following transportation damage:

Check the coupling carefully for damage.
Consult the manufacturer (Address see chapter 1).
3.3 Storage
CAUTION
Material damage to elastic elements and rubber parts can occur
as a result of:
Incorrect storage
These parts must be stored laid flat and so they cannot distort, and
protected from ozone, heat, light, moisture and solvents.
IMPORTANT
Rubber parts are marked where possible with their production date. From this date,
they may only be stored for a maximum of 5 years.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
3.3.1 Storage location

Requirements imposed on the storage location:
Moderately ventilated and low in dust
Dry (max. 65% humidity)
Temperature stabilized (-10°C to +25°C)
Free of ozone-producing devices such as light sources and electric motors
Free of UV light sources and direct sunlight
Do not store solvents and disinfectants, fuels or lubricants, acids, chemicals
etc. in the same location
For more details, refer to DIN 7716.
3.3.2 Storage of couplings / flexible elements

Unpack the parts.
Check the packaging for damage. Replace if necessary.
Check that the wax protection on steel components is intact. If necessary,
patch or renew.
Package the parts (for prolonged periods of storage, enclose desiccant and
weld into film).
Place the parts into storage.
3.4 Disposal
RECYCLING
Ensure safe, environmentally responsible disposal of operating supplies
and exchange parts. For this, locally provided recycling facilities and
regulations must be utilized.
For disposal, the coupling parts must be separated where possible and sorted
according to material type.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
4 Technical description
4.1 Characteristics
Highly torsional elasticity / backlash-free
Linear curve
Due to different shore hardness levels, the torsional rigidity can be adjusted
to vibration-related requirements
Dampens vibrations and impacts - compensates axial, radial and angular
alignment errors
Low-wear – durability – operational reliability – low maintenance
Compact, short design – connection dimensions in accordance with SAE J 620
or for connection of two shafts
Free axial movement
All-round ventilation (cooling) of the rubber washer
Suitable for high speeds
Large admissible bores
Simple mounting - axial plug-in capability
Temperature-resistant
4.2 Specifications
Admissible ambient temperatures:
NR: -45°C to +80°C (temporary minimum temperature 100°C)
SI: -45°C to +130°C
Ensure that suitable ventilation is provided in the mounting area of the coupling
so that the admissible ambient temperature is not exceeded.
For further technical details, see the catalogue and the dimensions contained in
the drawings.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
5 Alignment of the units being connected
IMPORTANT
The units should be aligned during assembly.
The overall misalignment is composed of the misalignment and the operating
misalignment. The permissible overall misalignment values can be found in the
catalogue and must not be exceeded.
Align the units that are to be connected as accurately as possible. In this way, a
long service life for the coupling and maximum operating misalignment values can
be achieved.
After completion of assembly, check the alignment of the coupling again and if
necessary correct.
5.1 Axial alignment

Determine the axial misalignment (see Fig. 5-1).
Take installation length L from the installation drawing.

Align the units (installation dimension = L± KA max).
Permissible axial alignment tolerance:

KA max=1.0 mm
Fig. 5-1 Axial misalignment

CM-800…18000-SCEW
5.2 Radial alignment
CAUTION
Material damage to elastically installed motors can occur as a
result of:
Disregard during alignment of the extent by which the motor
bearing settles
During vertical alignment, take into account the extent by which the
motor bearing settles. Please enquire about specifications for the
degree of settling from the motor manufacturer or motor bearing
manufacturer.
Measure the radial misalignment with a dial gauge (see Fig. 5-2).
Attach the dial gauge to the hub.

Set the sensor of the dial gauge radially against the centering.
Turn the hub with dial gauge and flywheel slowly by 360°.
Align the units (calculated deviation KR max).
Permissible radial alignment tolerance:

KR max=0.5 mm
Fig. 5-2 Radial misalignment

CM-800…18000-SCEW
5.3 Angular alignment

Measure the angular misalignment with a dial gauge (see Fig. 5-3).
Attach the dial gauge to the hub.

Position the sensor of the dial gauge radially against flat surface at a
distance R.
Turn the hub with dial gauge and flywheel slowly by 360°.
The maximum dial gauge deflection must not exceed the value 2xSw at any
point. The permissible tolerance SW max should be calculated according to formula
5-1 below.
Align the units (calculated deviation KW max).
Permissible angular alignment tolerance:

KW max=0.15°
Fig. 5-3 Angular misalignment
Formula 5-1 Calculated dimension SW

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6 Mounting
6.1 General assembly instructions
Any work method which impairs the safety of the coupling is prohibited.
The user undertakes to notify the manufacturer immediately of any changes
occurring at the coupling which could impair safety (address see chapter 1).
WARNING
Before starting work at the coupling, switch off the plant and secure
against unintentional start-up.
WARNING
Assembly of the coupling in the wrong sequence
Only ever assemble the coupling in the described sequence.
WARNING
Falling coupling components
Secure coupling components against falling to the floor.
CAUTION
of:
CAUTION
Material damage can occur as a result of:
Soiled joint surfaces
The surfaces that are to be joined must be free of dirt, preservatives
and lubricants.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
CAUTION
of:
Anaerobic adhesives (e.g. Loctite) used for screw locking
This type of screw locking medium may not be in contact with rubber
parts.
IMPORTANT
Screw preparation and tightening torque levels in accordance with CENTA data
sheet D13-016 (see chapter 11.1).
Use suitable lifting devices for assembly.
The following assembly stages are described for coupling CM-18000-SCEW.
Part illustration and marking may different slightly from installation drawing and
delivery state.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6.2 Mounting the hub

Mounting the hub as appropriate for the supplied design (see installation
drawing).
Mounting the hub with feather key, see chapter 6.2.1 .
Mounting the hub with conical oil interference fit, see chapter 6.2.2
6.2.1 Mounting the hub with feather key
IMPORTANT
To ease assembly of the hubs/flange hubs, warm them to a temperature of
120° - 150° C.
CAUTION
Incorrect heating of the hubs/flange hubs
Heat the hubs/flange hubs steadily in an oil bath, a fan oven, on an
electric hot plate, either inductive or with a flame (ring burner).
CAUTION
Hot coupling components
Use suitable protective gloves.
CAUTION
Hot hubs/flange hubs
Before further mounting of hubs/flange hubs, allow them to cool to
ambient temperature.
WARNING
Injuries and material damages can occur by:
Loosening adjustment screws (For fastening the hub/flange hubs)
Lock adjustment screw with Loctite.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
Fig. 6-1 Mounting the hub
Item Info Designation Remark
2/3 Hub
8/9 Threaded pin if existing
A/B Shaft Customer part
f Thread for threaded pin
Prepare the hub (2/3) for mounting. Degrease the thread (f).
Prepare the threaded pin (8/9) for mounting. Degrease the thread.
Apply a screw locking medium (e.g. Loctite) to the thread of the threaded pin
(8/9).
Push the hub (2/3) onto the shaft (A) with feather key.
Secure the hub (2/3) with the threaded pin (8/9; size acc. the installation
drawing, tightening torque see table below).
Threaded pin M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M20
Tightening torque 7 16 30 50 70 120 200

[Nm]
Table 6-1 Tightening torques for threaded pins

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6.2.2 Mounting the hub with conical oil interference fit
WARNING
Non-compliance with the operating instructions for the hydraulic
pumps
Before carrying out work with the hydraulic pumps, do not fail to read
their operating instructions. Only ever work with hydraulic pumps as
described in their operating instructions.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid spraying out
Use protective goggles.
Fig. 6-2 Mounting the hub with conical oil interference fit

CM-800…18000-SCEW
2/3 Hub
8/9 Screw plug G¼ or G¾

see installation drawing
A/B Shaft Customer part
a Face of shaft
b Face of hub
c Thread G¼ or G¾
see installation drawing
IMPORTANT
We recommend the following mounting fluids:
For mounting:
Oil with a viscosity 300 mm2/s at 20°C, e.g. SKF LHMF300
For dismantling:
Oil with a viscosity 900 mm2/s at 20°C, e.g. SKF LHDF900
Lightly oil the cone of the shaft (A/B).

Push the hub (2/3) onto the shaft (A/B).
Remove the screw plug (8/9) from the hub (2/3).
Connect the pump for expanding the hub (2/3) to the thread G¼ or G¾ (c).
Screw the pump for pushing on the hub to the shaft.
Build up the oil pressure to push on the hub.
WARNING
Too fast increase of the expanding pressure in the hub
The increase of the expanding pressure may not exceed
35 bar/minute.
WARNING
Insufficient expanding pressure in the hub
If the expanding pressure is too low, the necessary pushing pressure is
too high.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
Build up the oil pressure for expanding the hub slowly.

Build up the oil pressure alternately until the lift path (p up) of the hub (2/3)
is reached (for p up and reference faces, see installation drawing).
Decrease the oil pressure for expanding the hub.
Remove the pump for expanding the hub from the hub (2/3).
Maintain the oil pressure for pushing on the hub for one hour.
Decrease the oil pressure for pushing on the hub.
Remove the pump for pushing on the hub from the shaft.
Turn the hub (2/3), allow the oil to run out of the thread G¼ or G¾ (c) and
dispose of it correctly.
Screw the screw plug (8/9) into the hub (2/3).
IMPORTANT
Do not place a load on the hub for 24 hours.
IMPORTANT
Face of shaft must not protrude to face of hub. Otherwise radial replacement of other
coupling parts is not guaranteed.
6.3 Aligning the units

Align the units to be connected (see chapter 5).

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6.4 Mounting the flange
Fig. 6-3 Mounting the flange
2/3 Hub
4 Flange
6 Screw ISO4762-
Push the flange (4) onto the centring of the hub (3).
Screw the hub (3) with screws (6) to the flange (4).

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6.5 Mounting the rubber element
Fig. 6-4 Mounting the rubber element
1 Rubber element
2 Hub
3 Hub
4 Flange
6 Screw ISO4762-
Push the rubber element (1) onto the centring of the hub (2).
Screw the hub (2) with screws (6) to the rubber element (1).

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6.6 Mounting the bushes
Fig. 6-5 Mounting the bushes
1 Rubber element
4 Flange
5 Bush
7 Screw ISO4762-
Push the bush (5) into the centring of the flange (4).
Screw the bush (5) with screw (7) to the flange (4).
Repeat the mounting section above "crosswise", until all bushes (5) with
screws (7) are screwed.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
6.7 After completed mounting
WARNING
Loose screw connections
Before commissioning, the tightening torque levels of all screws must
be checked and corrected if necessary.
Before commencing long-term operation, the plant must successfully complete a

test run.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
7 Operation
WARNING
Worn coupling components
If the running noises change and/or vibrations occur turn the plant off
immediately.
Determine the fault and its root cause, and remedy.

The troubleshooting process is simplified by the table in the next chapter.
On principle in case of a fault, an analysis of the entire plant should be
performed.
7.1 Operating faults, root causes and remedy
Faults Possible root Remedy

causes
Running noises or Loose bolts 1. Switch off the plant

vibrations in the
2. Check the bolt torque levels and correct
plant
if necessary
3. Trial run
Breakage of the Inadmissibly high 1. Switch off the plant

rubber element torque
2. Exchange the rubber element
3. Trial run
Damage due to 1. Switch off the plant

rotary oscillation:
Motor idle 3. Trial run
running speed
too low
Cylinder failure
Inadmissibly high 1. Switch off the plant
ambient
temperature:
3. Trial run
Embrittlement of
the rubber
element NR,
surface cracks
on both sides
under 45°
Table 7-1 Troubleshooting table
In case of uncertainty or if you have questions, please contact our head office
(address see chapter 1).

CM-800…18000-SCEW
7.2 Admissible overall misalignment of the coupling

The overall misalignment values can be found in the catalogue.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
8 Care and maintenance
WARNING
The coupling requires low maintenance. We recommend a visual inspection at

the regular scheduled maintenance intervals for the whole unit.
8.1 Work to be performed

8.1.1 Cleaning the coupling
Remove any loose dirt from the coupling.
8.1.2 Visual inspection of the coupling

Inspect the coupling for cracks, chips or missing parts.
Replace faulty and missing parts.
8.1.3 Visual inspection of the rubber elements
IMPORTANT
Exchange the rubber elements:
In the event of damage, but after at the standard maintenance interval at the
engine at latest.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
Fig. 8-1 Visual inspection at the rubber elements
Pay attention to cracks / adherence of rubber and metal parts in the zones
marked by arrows (a).
Should the cracks be 3 mm or deeper, the rubber element must be exchanged
(c).
Wear of 3-4 mm to the round teeth on the load side is admissible (b).
8.1.4 Inspection of the screw connections

Check the tightening torque levels of all screws and if necessary, correct.
8.2 Replacing defective parts

Remove the coupling as described in chapter 9.
Replace wearing parts.
Mount the coupling as described in chapter 6.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
9 Dismantling
9.1 General dismantling instructions
Any work method which impairs the safety of the coupling is prohibited.
The user undertakes to notify the manufacturer immediately of any changes
occurring at the coupling which could impair safety (address see chapter 1).
IMPORTANT
The coupling is dismantled in reverse order to the assembly process.
Please refer to the illustrations in chapter 6.
WARNING
WARNING
Dismantling of the coupling in the wrong sequence
Only ever dismantle the coupling in the described sequence.
WARNING
Falling coupling components
Secure coupling components against falling to the floor.
CAUTION
of:
IMPORTANT
Use suitable lifting devices for dismantling.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
9.2 Dismantling the coupling

9.2.1 Dismantling the bushes
See Fig. 6-5:
Loosen and remove the screws (7) of the connection bushes (5) to the flange
(4).
Remove the bushes (5) off the centring of the flange (4).
9.2.2 Dismantling the rubber element

See Fig. 6-4:
Loosen and remove the screws (6) of the connection hub (2) to the rubber
element (1).
Pull the rubber element (1) off the centring of the hub (2) and remove it.
9.2.3 Dismantling the flange (if necessary)

See Fig. 6-3:
Loosen and remove the screws (6) of the connection hub (3) to the flange
(4).
Pull the flange (4) off the centring of the hub (3) and remove it.
9.2.4 Disconnecting the driving and driven units (if necessary)

Loosen and remove the screws of the connection of the driving and driven
units.
Pull driving and driven units apart.
9.3 Dismantling the hub (if necessary)

Dismantle the hub as appropriate for the supplied design (see installation
drawing).
Dismantling the hub with feather key, see chapter 9.3.1 .
Dismantling the hub with conical oil interference fit, see chapter 9.3.2 .
9.3.1 Dismantling the hub with feather key (if necessary)

See Fig. 6-1:
Loosen the threaded pin (8/9) from the hub (2/3).
Remove the hub (2/3) from the shaft (A/B).

CM-800…18000-SCEW
9.3.2 Dismantling the hub with conical oil interference fit

(if necessary)
See Fig. 6-2:
WARNING
Non-compliance with the operating instructions for the hydraulic
pumps
Before carrying out work with the hydraulic pumps, do not fail to read
their operating instructions. Only ever work with hydraulic pumps as
described in their operating instructions.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid spraying out
Use protective goggles.
WARNING
Injuries and material damages can occur by:
Suddenly loosening hubs
Secure the hub with a hydraulic tool against sudden axial loosening.
IMPORTANT
We recommend the following mounting fluids:
For mounting:
Oil with a viscosity 300 mm2/s at 20°C, e.g. SKF LHMF300
For dismantling:
Oil with a viscosity 900 mm2/s at 20°C, e.g. SKF LHDF900
Remove screw plug (8/9) from hub (2/3).

Connect the pump to the thread G¼ or G¾ (c) of hub (2/3) to expand the
hub.
Screw the pump to the shaft (A), in order to hold the hub.
Build up oil pressure in order to hold the hub.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
WARNING
Too fast increase of the expanding pressure in the hub
The increase of the expanding pressure may not exceed
35 bar/minute.
Slowly build up oil pressure to expand the hub (pmax= 1500 bar).
Slowly reduce the oil pressure for holding the hub.
Slowly reduce the oil pressure for expanding the hub.
Repeat the above mounting section until the hub is completely released from
the shaft.
Remove the pump for holding the hub from the shaft (A).
Remove pump for expanding the hub from the hub (2/3).
Turn the hub (2/3), drain oil out of the thread G¼ or G¾ (c) and dispose
correctly.
Screw the screw plug (8/9) into the hub (2/3).
9.4 Reassembling the coupling

Reassemble the coupling as described in chapter 6.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
10 Wearing and spare parts
WARNING
Mounting and/or utilization of non-original CENTA parts
Never use parts from other manufacturers.
A stock of the most important wearing and spare parts is the most important
condition to ensure that the coupling is functional and ready for operation at all
times.
We only provide a warranty for CENTA original parts.
Wearing part of this coupling:

Rubber element
When ordering a spare, specify:

Order no.
Coupling order no.
Drawing no.

CM-800…18000-SCEW
11 Annex
11.1 CENTA data sheet D13-016
(unlubricated screw connections)
Validity:
For all non-dynamically stressed screw connections with not lubricated shank
bolts in accordance with ISO 4014, ISO 4017 and ISO 4762 (DIN 912) with
metric standard thread in accordance with DIN ISO 262, unless other
specifications are given on CENTA documents.
Preparation of parts that are to be screwed together:
The joining areas must be free of dirt, preservatives and lubricants.
Preparation of screws that ARE NOT secured with liquid screw locking
medium:
Use screws as delivered.
Preparation of screws that ARE secured with liquid screw locking
medium:
Remove all grease from the thread.
Screw tightening method:
Screw in (by hand with torque wrench).

10 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
Valves/Compensator Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 10

CONTENTS
10 1 Butterfly Suction DN200 PN10 Lug w/electric actuator 2
10A 1 Butterfly Discharge DN150 PN16 Wafer w/electric actuator 3
10C 1 DN150 ERV-ZS DN150 ERV-ZS with extension limiter 4

10A Rev Date: 07/03/2023
VALVE Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 2
ITEM NO. 10 Suction Valve

General information
Quantity 1
Valve type Butterfly
Dimension DN200
Type Lug
Manufacturer i-Tork actuators / Alfa valves
Design Criteria
Fluid Sea water
Pipe standard DIN
Pressure class 10 bar
Flange rating EN1092-1 (PN10)
Technical data
Total weight 34 kg
Coating RAL 5017, Blue
Operation Electrical/manual
Actuator/Type ITQ0240/electric
Power supply 230VAC/ 50/60Hz/ 1ph
Remarks Man.override
Material
Body Ductile Iron GGG40
Disk AluBronze ASTM B148 AB2
Seat EPDM / NBR
Shaft St.st1.4122
Mechanical properties: Elongation 15%
Documentation
Type Approval Yes
Approval BV
Dimension print L200A10ITQ0240
Instruction manual ITQ-IMM-04-A and Alfa 001 R2
General Data Yes
10B Rev Date: 07/03/2023
VALVE Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 3
ITEM NO. 10A Discharge valve

General information
Quantity 1
Valve type Butterfly
Dimension DN150
Type Wafer
Manufacturer i-Tork actuators / Alfa valves
Design Criteria
Fluid Sea water
Pipe standard DIN
Pressure class 16 bar
Flange rating EN1092-1 (PN16)
Technical data
Total weight 25 kg
Coating RAL 5017, Blue
Operation Electrical/manual
Actuator/Type ITQ0160/electric
Power supply 230VAC/ 50/60Hz/ 1ph
Remarks Man.override
Material
Body Ductile Iron GGG40
Disk AluBronze ASTM B148 AB2
Seat EPDM / NBR
Shaft St.st1.4122
Mechanical properties: Elongation 15%
Documentation
Type Approval Yes
Approval NA
Dimension print W150A16ITQ0160
Instruction manual ITQ-IMM-04-A and Alfa 001 R2
General Data Yes
10D Rev Date: 07/03/2023
COMPENSATOR Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 4
ITEM NO. 10C DN150 ERV-ZS with extension limiter

General information
Quantity 1
Compensator type and dimension DN150 ERV-ZS with extension limiter
Manufacturer Elaflex
Characteristics For use at discharge side as expansion joint bellows
Design Criteria
Fluid Sea water
Pipe standard DIN
Pressure class PN16
Flange rating PN16/PN16
Technical data
Total weight 12.6 kg
Length 130
Measurement (D, kØ, ixØ) 285, 240, 8xØ22
Type ERV-150-ZS
Remarks With extension limiter (tie rod)
Material
Bellow NBR (nitrile)
Cover Chloroprene CR
Marking ERV-GS-150.16-ZS
Flanges Galv. St.37 / yellow steel flange
Documentation
Certificate reference RMRS
Certificate type Type Approval
Dimension print Yes
Instruction manual Yes
General Data Yes
DN ØA H H1 L1 R(pcd) SxT X S M Y Z D E.A. Type
200 337 204 159 60 295 8xM20 45° 115 338 229 259 192 ITQ 0240
DN200 Lug / ITQ0240
Technical Specfication: size : DN 200 Butterfly valve with electric actuator ITQ0240
1.Lug Type Butterfly Valve body material : GGG 40
2.Design STD: EN593 disc material : Alubronze AB2
Reference Drawing: - 63020002001E rev 00
3.Face to Face: EN558-1(ISO5752) seat material : EPDM/NBR
4.Flange Connection: EN1092-1(PN10) Weight (incl. actuator) : 34 kg
5.Top Flange: ISO5211
6.Max.W.P.(Bar): 10bar provided with electr. actuator
7.W.T.Range(°C) : EPDM(-23~120°C) ITQ0240 230V 50/60 Hz
optional
ITQ0240 110V - 120V 50/60 Hz Subject to technical modification
DN ØA H H1 L1 R(pcd) SxT X S M Y Z D E.A. Type
150 210 180 133 56 240 4xØ22 45° 115 338 229 259 140 ITQ 0160 DN150 Wafer / ITQ0160
Technical Specfication: size : DN 150 Butterfly valve with electric actuator ITQ0160
1.Wafer Type Butterfly Valve body material : GGG 40
2.Design STD: EN593 disc material : Alubronze AB2
3.Face to Face: EN558-1(ISO5752) seat material : EPDM/NBR
Reference Drawing: - 53015001502E rev 00
4.Flange Connection: EN1092-1(PN16)
Weight (incl. actuator) : 25 kg
5.Top Flange: ISO5211
6.Max.W.P.(Bar): 16bar
7.W.T.Range(°C) : EPDM(-23~120°C) provided with electr. actuator
ITQ0160 230V 50/60 Hz
optional
ITQ0160 110V - 120V 50/60 Hz Subject to technical modification
ERV Zugstangen und Angularverspannung ? ERV Tie Rods and Angular Limiters
Längenbegrenzungsflansche − Type ZS Reaktionskräfte von ERV-Gummikompensatoren

(Einbaulänge = 130 mm)
Aus der nebenstehenden Tabelle ergibt sich, dass die Reaktions- DN 300 DN 250
kräfte bei den kleinen ERV-Dimensionen bis DN 50 so gering sind, 10 000
7500 DN 200
dass Längenbegrenzer normalerweise nicht erforderlich sind.
Längenbegrenzer sind nur dann nötig, wenn es nicht möglich 5000
kg DN 150
ist, das Rohrleitungssystem mit ausreichenden Festpunkten zu
sichern oder eine Teilentlastung der Festpunkte gewünscht wird. 2500
DN 225
Die erforderlichen Zugstangen werden so bemessen, dass sie
1000 DN 100
auch die aus dem Prüfdruck resultierenden Reaktionskräfte
aufnehmen können. 750 DN 80
500
Für die hauptsächlich erforderliche Axialbegrenzung haben sich die
DN 65
abgebildeten Ausführungen mit integrierter Verspannung sehr gut 250
bewährt. Die Zugstangen mit hoher Festigkeit (Stahl 8.8) sind axial
auf die tatsächlichen Einbaumaße einstellbar. Sie sind elastisch DN 50
gelagert in geräuschdämmenden Gummibuchsen aus witterungs- 100
1 2 3 4 5 6 10 16 20 25
beständigem Kunstkautschuk. Ab DN 350 sind die Zugstangen bar –––––▶
grundsätzlich in Kugelscheiben und Kegelpfannen gelagert.
Pressure thrust forces of ERV Expansion Joints
(installation length = 130 mm)
Nennweite Anzahl der BESTELL-

Zugstangen NUMMER
DN Number Part
tie rods Number
mm Außenverspannung
Type
mit Gummibuchse
25 2 ERV 25 … ZS
Type ... ZS
32 2 ERV 32 … ZS (bis / up to DN 300)
40 2 ERV 40 … ZS Tie rods with outer

50 2 ERV 50 … ZS limitation in
rubber bushings
65 2 ERV 65 … ZS
80 2 ERV 80 … ZS
100 2 ERV 100 … ZS
125 2 ERV 125 … ZS Außenverspannung
150 2 ERV 150 … ZS mit Kugelscheibe
und Kegelpfanne
200 2 ERV 200 … ZS
Type ... ZS
250 2 ERV 250 … ZS (ab / from DN 350)
300 4 ERV 300 … ZS Tie rods with

350 4 ERV 350 … ZS outer limitation
in spherical discs
400 4 ERV 400 … ZS and conical seats
500 4 ERV 500 … ZS
600 4 ERV 600 … ZS
Angaben für Flansche DIN PN 10, Änderungen der Zugstangenanzahl bei anderen
Flanschnormen vorbehalten. Sonderausführungen · Special Designs
Values for flanges DIN PN 10, number of tie rods may change with different flange
standards.
Innen- und
Tied Flanges – Type ZS Außenverspannung
The table shows that the pressure thrust forces in small ERV dimen-
Type ... ZSS
(bis / up to DN 300)
sions up to DN 50 are this low that limiters normally are not necessary.
Limiters are recommended when it is not possible to secure the pipe Tie rods with inner
system with sufficient fixed points or when a part relief of the fixed and outer limitation
points is desired.
The required limiters are measured to absorb also the reaction forces
resulting from the test pressure.
For the mainly required axial limitation the shown types with
integrated tie bars have proved well. The tie bars with high stability
(steel 8.8) can be adjusted to the actual installation measurements.
Angular-
The tie bars lie elastically in noise reducing rubber bushes of Innenverspannung
weatherproof rubber. From DN 350 the tie rods lie in prinicipal in
conical seats and spherical washers. Type ... RG
Angular limiter
464
Gebräuchliche Flanschmaße · Commonly used Flange Measurements
Flanschnorm
DIN PN 6 DIN PN 10 DIN PN 16 DIN PN 25 DIN PN 40
Flange Standard
Bestellnummer
.6 .10 .16 .25 .40
Part Number
DN D k n l D k n l D k n l D k n l D k n l
mm in. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
25 1" 115 85 4 14 115 85 4 14
32 1 ¼" 120 90 4 14 140 100 4 18 140 100 4 18
40 1 ½" 130 100 4 14 150 110 4 18 150 110 4 18
50 2" 140 110 4 14 165 125 4 18 165 125 4 18
identisch mit PN 16 identisch mit PN 40
65 2 ½" 160 130 4 14 185 145 4 18 185 145 8 18
identical with PN 16 identical with PN 40
80 3" 190 150 4 18 200 160 8 18 200 160 8 18
100 4" 210 170 4 18 220 180 8 18 235 190 8 22
125 5" 240 200 8 18 250 210 8 18 270 220 8 26
150 6" 265 225 8 18 285 240 8 22 300 250 8 26
200 8" 320 280 8 18 340 295 8 22 340 295 12 22 360 310 12 26 375 320 12 30
250 10" 375 335 12 18 395 350 12 22 405 355 12 26 425 370 12 30 450 385 12 33
300 12" 440 395 12 22 445 400 12 22 460 410 12 26 485 430 16 30 515 450 16 33
350 14" 490 445 12 22 505 460 16 22 520 470 16 26 555 490 16 33 580 510 16 36
400 16" 540 495 16 22 565 515 16 26 580 525 16 30 620 550 16 36 660 585 16 39
450 18" 595 550 16 22 615 565 20 26 640 585 20 30 670 600 20 36 685 610 20 39
500 20" 645 600 20 22 670 620 20 26 715 650 20 33 730 660 20 36 755 670 20 42
600 24" 755 705 20 26 780 725 20 30 840 770 20 36 845 770 20 39
700 28" 860 810 24 26 895 840 24 30 910 840 24 36 960 875 24 42
800 32" 975 920 24 30 1015 950 24 33 1025 950 24 39 1085 990 24 48
900 36" 1075 1020 24 30 1115 1050 28 33 1125 1050 28 39 1185 1090 28 48
1000 40" 1175 1120 28 30 1230 1160 28 36 1255 1170 28 42 1320 1210 28 56
Werkstoffe: verzinkter Stahl (Standard), Edelstahl, Bronze, Aluminium, feuerverzinkter Stahl, RILSAN-beschichteter Stahl etc. − siehe Seite 403
Materials: zinc plated steel (standard), stainless steel, bronze, aluminium, hot galvanized steel, RILSAN coated steel etc. − see page 403
Flanschnorm
ANSI B 16.5 150 lb/sq. in ANSI B 16.5 300 lb/sq. in. SAE J518 c
Flange Standard
Bestellnummer
.ASA 150 .ASA 300 .SAE
Part Number
DN D k n l D k n l G H I L n l
mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm mm mm mm mm mm

25 1" 108,0 4 ½" 79,4 3 ⅛" 4 15,9 ⅝" 123,8 4 ⅞" 88,9 3 ½" 4 19,0 ¾"
32 1 ¼" 117,5 4⅝" 88,9 3 ½" 4 15,9 ⅝" 133,4 5 ¼" 98,4 3 ⅞" 4 19,0 ¾" 80 58,7 30,2 75 4 13
40 1 ½" 127,0 5" 98,4 3 ⅞" 4 15,9 ⅝" 155,6 6 ⅛" 114,3 4 ¾" 4 22,2 ¾" 95 70,0 35,7 83 4 13
50 2" 152,4 6" 120,7 4 ¾" 4 19,0 ¾" 165,1 6 ½" 127,0 5" 8 19,0 ¾" 102 78,0 43,0 95 4 13
65 2 ½" 177,8 7" 139,7 5 ½" 4 19,0 ¾" 190,5 7 ½" 149,2 5 ⅞" 8 22,2 ⅞" 114 89,0 51,0 115 4 13
80 3" 190,5 7 ½" 152,4 6" 4 19,0 ¾" 209,6 8 ¼" 168,3 6 ⅝" 8 22,2 ⅞" 134 106,4 62,0 125 4 18
100 4" 228,6 9" 190,5 7 ½" 8 19,0 ¾" 254,0 10" 200,0 7⅞" 8 22,2 ⅞" 162 130,0 78,0 147 4 18
125 5" 254,0 10" 215,9 8 ½" 8 22,2 ⅞" 279,4 11" 235,0 9 ¼" 8 22,2 ⅞" 190 152,4 92,1 170 4 18
150 6" 279,4 11" 241,3 9 ½" 8 22,2 ⅞" 317,5 12 ½" 269,9 10 ⅝" 12 22,2 ⅞"
200 8" 342,9 13 ½" 298,5 11 ¾" 8 22,2 ⅞" 381,0 15" 330,2 13" 12 25,4 1"
250 10" 406,4 16" 361,9 14 ¼" 12 25,4 1" 444,5 17 ½" 387,3 15 ¼" 16 28,6 1 ⅛"
300 12" 482,6 19" 431,8 17" 12 25,4 1" 520,7 20 ½" 450,8 17 ¾" 16 31,7 1 ¼"
350 14" 533,4 21" 476,2 18 ¾" 12 28,6 1 ⅛" 584,2 23" 514,3 20 ¼" 20 31,7 1 ¼"
400 16" 596,9 23 ½" 539,7 21 ¼" 16 28,6 1 ⅛" 647,7 25 ½" 571,5 22 ½" 20 34,9 1 ⅜"
450 18" 635,0 25" 577,9 22 ¾" 16 31,7 1 ¼" 711,2 28" 628,7 24 ¾" 24 34,9 1 ⅜"
500 20" 698,5 27 ½" 635,0 25 20 31,7 1 ¼" 774,7 30 ½" 685,8 27" 24 34,9 1 ⅜"
600 24" 812,8 32" 749,3 29 ½" 20 34,9 1 ⅜" 914,4 36" 812,8 32" 24 41,3 1 ⅝"
Werkstoffe: verzinkter Stahl (Standard), Edelstahl, Bronze, Aluminium, feuerverzinkter Stahl, RILSAN-beschichteter Stahl etc. − siehe Seite 403
Materials: zinc plated steel (standard), stainless steel, bronze, aluminium, hot galvanized steel, RILSAN coated steel etc. – see page 403
462
Bewegungsbereich Type ERV-GS · Range of Movement Type ERV-GS
Zulässiger statischer Bewegungsbereich im Betriebszustand bei
Einsatz von Flanschen mit Stützkragen bis 60° C
Allowable static range of movement in service with usage of collar flanges up to 60° C
ERV-GS
\°
EL L L l
Baulänge Balggröße Einbaulänge axial lateral angular

Length Bellow Size Installation Length
BL DN EL min. EL max. L min. L max. l

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] \
25 – 80 120 135 100 145 ± 15 ± 20
130 100 – 150 120 135 100 145 ± 15 ± 15
200 – 300 125 140 115 150 ± 10 ± 5
150 80 – 150 140 160 115 170 ± 15 ± 15
175 200 – 250 165 185 150 195 ± 15 ± 5
200 – 350 190 210 160 230 ± 25 ± 10

200
400 – 600 190 210 160 230 ± 25 ± 5
250 450 240 260 210 280 ± 30 ± 5
Zulässiger Unterdruck [mbar] · Permissable Vacuum [mbar]

DN 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000
ohne / without
VSD / VSR
max. max. max. max. max. -800 -700 -700 -700 -700 -600 -400 -400 -300 -300 -200
mit / with
VSD
max. max. max. max. max. max. -600 -400 -200
mit / with
VSR
max. max. max. max. max. max. max. -800 -800 -700
mit / with
VSRV
max. max. max.
Daten gemessen mit neuen Kompensatoren in Standardbaulängen bei Data measured at room temperature with new expansion joints
Raumtemperatur mit nicht quellenden Medien. Für quellende Medien in standard length and non swelling media. For swelling media
ist ein Sicherheitsfaktor zu berücksichtigen. Ein gestauchter Einbau use a safety factor. A compressed installation improves the in the
verbessert die in der Tabelle genannte Vakuumfestigkeit. Die maximale table listed vacuum resistance. The maxium permittable elongation
zulässige Streckung (L max.) führt zu einer um bis zu 50 % geringeren (L max.) reduces the vaccum resistance by 50 %. For this case we
Vakuumfestigkeit. Für diesen Fall empfehlen wir die Verwendung von recommend to use vacuum support spirals or vaccum support rings
Vakuum-Stützdrahtspiralen oder Vakuum-Stützringen (s. Katalogs. 468). (see catalogue page 468).
Zusammenhänge von Überdruck, Bewegungsbereich und Temperatur Dependencies of overpressure, range of movement and temperature
entnehmen Sie bitte der Tabelle auf Katalogseite 404. please see table on catalogue page 404.
Zulassungen · Approvals
Diese Zertifikate für Type ERV-GS können Sie herunterladen unter These certificates for type ERV-GS can be downloaded from
www.elaflex.de/zertifikate/erv www.elaflex.de/english/certificates/erv
Übersicht aller Zertifikate auf unserer Kataglogseite 472 / Overview of all certificates on catalogue page 472
428
Electric Actuator
ITQ Series
BS EN ISO 9001:2000
INTRODUCTION
- I-Tork controls designs,

produces and provides
high quality actuators and
services related to valve
automation.
- Our long years
experience in the automation
field enables us to launch our
ITQ series electric
actuator which has
compact size, robust
construction, reliable
performance and ability to
integrate fully into
sophisticated control
systems.
- I-Tork controls is always
ready to provide you with
our ITQ series actuator and
accessories, with quality
service.
2
FEATURES
- Compact and robust construction, light weight providing high output torque
(Max 9000Nm).
- Wide range of torque variation (From min 100Nm to max 9000Nm).
- Hard anodized aluminum housing inside and outside with external powder coated
against severe industrial environment.
- Enclosure using radial seals & O-rings that provide protection to waterproof IP67
(Nema 4 & 6) and optional watertight IP68
- Mounting base according to ISO5211 standard.
- Removable drive bushing for easy machining and mounting.
- Self-locking provided by double worm gearing (no brake required).
- Auto-declutching manual override handwheel with padlockable auto / manual
switchable lever.
- Reliable Mechanical Torque sensing system providing safe operation in overload
condition.
- Large size window and indicator provides better position indication from a distance.
- Various Local position control options providing easy commissioning and operation in
field.
- Digitalized control component.
3
CONSTRUCTION
ᐭ Housing
- Hard anodized Aluminum casting and external epoxy

powder coated against severe industrial environment.
ᐮ͑Gearing
External mechanical
stopper - Precisely machined double worm gear c/w minimum
- Prevents over run of travel
angle when limit switch fails. back-lash, low noise, high output torque.
Cable entries
- Standard 2-PF3/4(Max 1)
for various cable gland. ᐯ͑Self locking
- Provided by double worm gearing to keep

position of valve unchanged against
reverse torque from valve.
ᐰ͑Sealing
- By O-ring in all interfaces

IP67(standard), and double o-ring
Removable drive for IP68 (option)
bushing and ISO5211
mounting base
- (F07~F30) for easy
mounting on valve. ᐱ͑Handwheel
- Different sizes depending on

actuator torque, and knob on
handwheel for easy operation.
ᐲ͑Motor
- Specially designed induction motor to

Captive cover bolts generate high starting torque and
- Designed to prevent losing it during high efficiency equipped with thermal
maintenance or installation. protector to prevent damage from
* All external bolts are stainless steel for over heating.
rust prevention.
- Insulation class F
Tapered interface between cover and lower housing

- For easy lifting cover up from lower housing for wiring or maintenance.
Standard
4
Indicator Torque switches
- Continuous mechanical position indicator and - Protect actuator from
window with dial damage caused by
overload from the driven
valve over the whole travel.
- 1 each for open / close
Limit switches
- Directly engaged with
driving shaft to set
accurate position of valve.
- 2 ea for each travel end
(open/close).
- Optional Extra Limit
Switches (Max 4 ea for
each end) : Except for
ITQ0100
Terminal
- Spring loaded push type
terminal for tight wiring
connection under severe
vibration.
Manual override
- Auto / Manual switchable lever and
handwheel engagement for emergency
manual operation.
- Drive force automatically resorted by
motor start, unless lever padlocked to
prevent this occuring.
Space Heater
- Anti-condensation
5
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Model ITQ 0100 ITQ 0160 ITQ 0240 ITQ 0350 ITQ 0500 ITQ 0800 ITQ 1100 ITQ 2000 ITQ 3000 ITQ 6000 ITQ 9000
Rated torque (Nm) 100 160 240 350 500 800 1100 2000 3000 6000 9000
Duty cycle S4 (%) 50 50 50 50 30 25 25 25 25 25 25
Operating time (second)
50Hz 21 26 26 31 31 39 39 59 59 178 178
60Hz 18 22 22 26 26 32 32 50 50 149 149
24DC(No Load) 18 33 33 37 34 - - - - - -
Max bore Size (mm)
Key( ) 22 25 25 40 40 48 48 75 75 120 120
Square( ) 20 23 23 34 34 40 40 64 64 100 100
Rated current (A)
1Phase / 110V / 50Hz 0.98 1.60 1.62 1.72 3.60 3.90 3.90 4.95 6.6 4.95 6.6
60Hz 1.10 1.70 1.72 1.80 3.90 4.20 4.30 4.55 6.1 4.55 6.1
1Phase / 220V / 50Hz 0.52 0.85 0.87 0.92 1.50 2.05 2.15 3.30 4.00 3.30 4.00
60Hz 0.58 0.90 0.90 0.95 1.60 2.20 2.30 2.20 3.30 2.20 3.30
3Phase / 380V / 50Hz 0.43 0.30 0.32 0.32 0.52 0.82 0.84 1.5 1.6 1.5 1.6
60Hz 0.33 0.30 0.32 0.32 0.56 0.88 0.90 1.8 2.0 1.8 2.0
3Phase / 440V / 50Hz 0.59 0.30 0.32 0.32 0.55 0.82 0.84 2.3 2.5 2.3 2.5
60Hz 0.42 0.32 0.35 0.35 0.58 0.88 0.88 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.4
AC / DC 24V 2.8 1.8 2.4 3.8 5.0 - - - - - -
Motor insulation class F F F F F F F F F F F
ISO 5211 mounting flange F07 F07/F10 F07/F10 F10/F12 F10/F12 F12/F14 F12/F14 F16 F16 F25/F30 F25/F30
Weight (Kgs) 7 15 15 20 20 25 25 42 42 152 152
No of handwheel turns 10 12 12 14 14 17 17 13 13 39 39
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Enclosure Weatherproof IP67, NEMA4 4X and 6, O-ring sealed
Main Power supply 110/220VAC/1Ph/50/60Hz, 380/440/VAC/3Ph/50/60/Hz ·10%, 24VDC
Control power supply 110/220VAC/1Ph/50/60Hz ·10%
Duty cycle(on-off) S2: 10Min~30Min
Duty cycle(modulating) S4, 30~50%, 300~1200 start/Hour
Motor Squirrel Cage induction motor
Limit switches 2 each for Open and Close (SPDT 250VAC/10A rating)
Torque switches 1 each for Open and Close (SPDT 250VAC/10A rating except for ITQ 0100)
Stall protection/ set temp. Built in Thermal protection, Open 150oC·5oC, Close 97oC·15oC
Travel angle 90o · 5o (0o ~ 100o)
Position indicator Continuous mechanical indicator with arrow
Manual override De-clutchable
Self locking Provided by double worm gearing (no brake)
Mechanical stopper 1 each for each travel end (Open and Close), external & adjustable
Space Heater 5W(110/220VAC) for anti-condensation
Cable entries 2 - PF 3/4 TAP
Lubrication EP type grease
Terminal block Screw and Lever Push type (spring loaded)
Ambient temperature Basic actuator : -20oC~+70oC
c/w control options : -10oC~+60oC
Ambient humidity 90%RH Max (Non-Condensing)
Anti vibration XYZ 10g. 02~34Hz, 30 minutes
External coating Dry powder (Polyester)
6
OPTIONS AVAILABLE
Mechanical
Symbol Description Remark
EX Explosion proof (Ex d II B T4) Approved by KTL, ATEX, NEPSI

WT Watertight (IP68), Temporary submersible 10M Head 100hours
ALS Auxiliary limit switches (Max 2 for each travel end)
ATS Auxiliary torque switches (Max 2 for each travel end) Except for ITQ 0100
o o o o
EXT Extended travel angle (up to 120 , 135 , 180 , 270 ,) Except for ITQ with Gear box
SV Variation in torque and operating speed Please consult before ordering
Remote monitoring and control

PK Potentiometer kit (output signal : 0~1 Kohm)
High resolution potentiometer and precisely machined gearing
are directly engaged with drive shaft to feedback
continuous position of valve PK
CT Current transmitter (output signal : 4-20mA)

Zero / Span Adjustment
Remote position controller (by input and output signal)

RPC
Input : 4-20mA, 0-10VDC, 2~10VDC, 1~5VDC, 0~5VDC
/ Signal CT
Output : 4-20mA
configuration (Option : 0-10VDC, 2~10VDC, 1~5VDC, 0~5VDC)
Auto-calibration
Reverse operating direction
Bus Profibus Communication

Communication CANopen Communication
Local control
RPC
LP4 for 1 & 3 Phase (ITQ 0100~9000)
Control power : Free Voltage (85~265VAC) 50/60Hz, Option : 24VDC
Magnetic selector switches, SMPS (Switching Module Power Supply)
: Open/Close & Local/Stop/Remote
Local lamp indication

: Power - White(on), Remote : Blue(on),
: In case of Close Torque Switch Trip -
Yellow(on) + Green (flickering : only at Local Position)
: In case of Open Torque Switch Trip -
LP4 / LM4 Yellow(on) + Red (flickering : only at Local Position)
: Full Close - Green(on), Closing - Green(flickering : only at Local Position)
: Full Open - Red(on), Opening - Red(flickering : only at Local Position)
* Options Available : PK, CT, RPC(Modulating), IP68, Explosion proof
LM4 for 3 Phase (ITQ 0100~9000)

Including the same functions as LP4
Reversing electric contactors, Transformer
7
Local control
ICM1 for 1 & 3 Phase (Integral Control Module) (ITQ 0160~9000)
Main Power : 3Ph / 220/380/440 VAC

1Ph / 110/220 VAC
Control power : 24 VDC (Internal Power)
(Option : 110 VAC, 220 VAC (External Power))
Magnetic selector switches
: Open/Close & Local/Stop/Remote
Reversing electric contactors, Transformer, Phase Detector
Auto-Phase Discriminator
Local lamp indication
: Power - White(on), Remote : Blue(on),
: In case of Close Torque Switch Trip - Yellow(on) + Green(flickering)
: In case of Open Torque Switch Trip - Yellow(on) + Red(flickering)
: Full Close - Green(on), Closing - Green (flickering)
: Full Open - Red(on), Opening - Red (flickering)
ICM1
Single & Reverse Phasing : (Yellow + Green + Red) all flickering
* Options Available : Explosion Proof, IP68
ICM2 for 1 & 3 phase (integral with LCD Display) (ITQ 0160~9000)
Including the same functions as ICM1

Reversing electric contactors, Transformer,
Auto-Phase Discriminator, LCD Display
* Options Available : CT, RPC(Modulating),
Explosion Proof,
IP68, Bus Communication
ICM2
ICM3 for 1 & 3 phase (integral with LCD Display/IP68 Enclosure)

(ITQ 0160~9000)
Including the same functions as ICM2

Reversing electric contactors, Transformer, Auto-Phase Discriminator,
LCD Display, IP68, Explosion Proof, RPC(Modulating), Bus Communication,
34pins seperate compartment for terminal block
Fail safe
BP for 1 Phase (ITQ 0160~0500)

Motor : 24 VDC
Rechargeable Battery back up - Fail safe function
When Main power is alive, actuator works as normally.
Once power fails, actuator will move to pre-set fail safe position.
Input power : Free Voltage (85~265 VAC) 50/60Hz
Output contacts : open/close/Alarm relay
LED signal indication : 4 LEDs (Full Open/Close, Over Torque and Power)
Rechargeable battery : 2.0AH 27.5VDC(Ni-Cd)
8
BASIC ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
With Gear Box
Type ITQ 0100 ITQ 0160 ITQ 0240 ITQ 0350 ITQ 0500 ITQ 0800 ITQ 1100 ITQ 2000 ITQ 3000 ITQ 6000 ITQ 9000
Flange F07 F07 F07 F10 F10 F12 F12 F16 F16 F25 F25
ISO5211 F10 F10 F12 F12 F14 F14 F30 F30
C 70 70 70 102 102 125 125 165 165 254 254
102 102 125 125 140 140 298 298
A M8 M8/M10 M8/M10 M10/M12 M10/M12 M12/M16 M12/M16 M20 M20 M16/M20 M16/M20
B 14 14/17 14/17 17/21 17/21 20/25 20/25 32 32 30/35 30/35
D(Key) 22 25 25 40 40 48 48 75 75 120 120
D(Squ.) 20 23 23 38 38 40 40 64 64 100 100
E 50 58.5 58.5 80 80 95 95 135 135 216 216
F 88 125 125 148 148 178 178 226 226 350 350
G 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5
H 37 57 57 62 62 67 67 90 90 114 114
S 125 140 140 170 170 195 195 225 225 225 225
X 258 338 338 357 357 380 380 440 440 532 532
Y 172 229 229 244 244 287 287 375 375 417 417
Z 245 284 284 313 313 338 338 385 385 668 668
(mm) (mm)
2-PF3/4"
2-PF3/4"
OPEN
C
F12 4-A*B
8-A*B
OPEN
80
90
70
100 75
100
75
OPEN
50
60
50
25
25
%
CLOSE
CLOSE
50
0
0
SHUT
40
25
25
0
30
50
50
CLOSE
10
20
75
75 100
OPEN
C
F10 C'
8-A'*B'
OPEN
X Y
X Y
S
S
Z
CL
EN O
OP
SE
MANU
AUTO CL
N O
E
OP
S
E
G H
LOCK
MANU
AUTO
D
Z
LOCK
E
F
H
G
D
E
F
9
TYPICAL WIRING (ITQ 0100)
110/220VAC/50/60Hz, 1Ph(On-Off) 110/220VAC/50/60Hz, 1Ph(Modulating : RPC)

INCOMING POWER
INCOMING POWER ITQ0100-70000-F ITQ0100-70500-F
AC 1PH ( V)
AC 1PH ( V)
NEUTRAL
LIVE
NEUTRAL
POSITION
LIVE
INPUT INDICATOR
AUX. COM
AUX. ACLS
AUX. AOLS
COM SIGNAL
AUTO
MAN
COM
C O COM
AUX. ACLS
AUX. AOLS
AUX. COM
C O
CLOSE OPEN STOP CLOSE CLOSE OPEN OPEN STOP CLOSE
LAMP LAMP OPEN LAMP LAMP
PROPOSED CUSTOMER'S WIRING PROPOSED CUSTOMER'S WIRING
ACTUATOR WIRING ACTUATOR WIRING
+ - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
GRE
WHI
WHI
PUR
GRE
BLU
RED
GRY
PUR
GRE
BLU
WHI
WHI
BLA
BLA
GRE
WHI
G/F
PUR
GRE
BLU
RED
PUR
GRE
BLU
RED
BLU
BLA
BLA
2 3 2 3
2 3 2 3 NC NO NC NO
TP NC NO NC NO
MTP TP
M M MTP
1 1
OPTION 1 1 COM COM
COM COM OPTION ACLS AOLS
RED
BLU
ACLS AOLS WHI RED

G/F WHI
RED
CAPACITOR BLU
BRO
WHI
5
G/F
OPEN
WHI
CAPACITOR GRY
4 IN OUT
CLOSE
BRO
2 3 2 3 RED
HEATER
2 3 2 3 NC NO NC NO 3
HEATER
NC NO NC NO WHI
2 P3 P2 P1
BLA
POWER
1 1
1 COM
COM
ORA
GRY
PUR
CLS OLS REMOTE POSITION
1 1 CONTROLLER(RPC)
COM COM BASE BASE
G/F
G/F
CLS OLS EARTH 3 2 1

EARTH
FEED BACK
POTENTIOMETER
380/440VAC/50/60Hz, 3Ph(On-Off) TORQUE AND LIMIT SWITCHES OPERATION

SWITCH CLOSE INTERMEDIATE OPEN
ITQ0100-80000-F
CLS 1-2
MAIN POWER
AC 3PH ( V) CLS 1-3
U V W CONTROL POWER
AC 1PH or DC 24V OLS 1-2
1 3 5 1 3 5 OLS 1-3
AUX. COM
AUX. ACLS
AUX. AOLS
CC
OC
ACLS1-2
OC CC COM
2 4 6 2 4 6
CC OC C O
CLOSE OPEN OPEN STOP CLOSE
ACLS1-3
LAMP LAMP
PROPOSED CUSTOMER'S WIRING
ACTUATOR WIRING AOLS1-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 AOLS1-3
GRE
RED
BRO
PUR
GRE
RED
PUR
GRE
BLU
WHI
WHI
BLU
BLU
BLA
G/F
Closing Torque Switch interrupts control if

CTS 1-3
TP
Mechanical overload occurs during closing cycle
2 3 2 3
Opening Torque Switch interrupts control if
OTS 1-3
OPTION NC NO NC NO
Mechanical overload occurs during opening cycle

WHI
2 3 2 3 1 1
NC NO NC NO COM COM
G/F
ACLS AOLS
RED **Important Notice**
HEATER
1 1
COM COM
BASE
EARTH
CLS OLS
1. The Electric Wiring Diagrams shall be modified with
terminal no and wires in Red Color for our customers’ convenience
from 1st of June 2009.
G/F
MTP MTP
M 2. Please only refer to the Wiring Diagram Sticker or separate Wiring

Diagram inside of each actuator. If there is any confusion please
contact our distributor.
11
TYPICAL WIRING (ITQ 0160 ~ ITQ 9000)
110/220VAC/50/60Hz, 1Ph(On-Off) 110/220VAC/50/60Hz, 1Ph(Modulating : RPC)
INCOMING POWER ITQ0160-70000-F ITQ0160-70500-F

AC 1PH ( V) INCOMING POWER
AC 1PH ( V)
NEUTRAL
LIVE
NEUTRAL
LIVE
COM
POSITION
MAN AUTO
INDICATOR
AUX. CONTACT INPUT
COM MAX. 250VAC 10A SIGNAL
OT C O AUX. CONTACT COM
MAX. 250VAC 10A OT C O
OVER CLOSE OPEN
TORQUE LAMP LAMP OPEN STOP CLOSE OVER CLOSE OPEN
TORQUE LAMP LAMP OPEN STOP CLOSE
PROPOSED CUSTOMER'S WIRING LAMP LAMP
PROPOSED CUSTOMER'S WIRING
ACTUATOR WIRING BLU ACTUATOR WIRING
RED BLU
RED
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
GRE
RED
BLU
WHI
RED
BLU
YEL
PUR
GRE
BLU
RED
WHI
GRY
PUR
RED
GRE
BLU
BLA
WHI
BLA
WHI
BLA
GRE
RED
BLU
WHI
RED
BLU
YEL
PUR
GRE
BLU
RED
G/F
PUR
RED
GRE
BLU
BLA
BLA
BLA
2 3 2 3 TP 2 3 2 3
TP NC NO NC NO
NC NO NC NO
2 3 2 3
BLU
RED
2 3 2 3
NC NO NC NO OPTION NC NO NC NO
BLU
RED
OPTION 1 1
COM COM
ACLS AOLS
1 1 1 1 CONDENSER
CAPACITOR COM COM COM COM CTS 1 OTS 1
ACLS AOLS COM COM
CTS OTS
G/F WHI
BRO
WHI
WHI
BRO
WHI
BLU 5
GRY OPEN
2 3 2 3 4 IN OUT
CLOSE
G/F
NC NO NC NO RED
3
2 3 2 3
M MTP WHI
2 P3 P2 P1
NC NO NC NO CLS 1 OLS 1 BLA POWER
1
HEATER 5W
COM COM
GRY
PUR
ORA
REMOTE POSITION
M MTP
CLS 1 OLS
1
COM BASE HEATER
5W
CONTROLLER(RPC)
3 2 1
COM EARTH
BASE FEED BACK
EARTH POTENTIOMETER
ALS : Auxiliary Limit Switch 380/440VAC/50/60Hz, 3Ph(On-Off)

AOLS : Auxiliary Open Limit Switch (Dry contact)
ACLS : Auxiliary Close Limit Switch (Dry contact) ITQ0160-80000-F
MAIN POWER
O : Open Lamp AC 3PH ( V)
U V W
CONTROL POWER
C : Close Lamp AC 1PH ( V) or DC 24V
OT : Over Torque Lamp 1 3 5 1 3 5

CC
OC
CLS : Close Limit Switch (250VAC 10A) AUX.

FULL
AUX.
FULL
2 4 6 2 4 6
CC OC OT C O CLOSE OPEN
OLS : Open Limit Switch (250VAC 10A) 250VAC, 10A 250VAC, 10A
OVER CLOSE OPEN OPEN STOP CLOSE
TORQUE
CTS : Close Torque Switch (250VAC 10A) LAMP
LAMP LAMP
OTS : Open Torque Switch (250VAC 10A) PROPOSE CUSTOMER'S WIRING

OC CC
ACTUATOR WIRING
CC : Close Magnetic Coil

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
OC : Open Magnetic Coil
GRE
RED
BLU
BLA
WHI
RED
BLU
YEL
PUR
GRE
BLU
RED
WHI
PUR
RED
GRE
BLU
M : Motor 2 3 2 3
TP NC NO NC NO
TP : Thermal Protector (250VAC 15A option) 2
NC
3
NO
2
NC
3
NO
MTP : Thermal Protector built in motor 1

COM
1
COM
1 OTS 1 ACLS AOLS
CTS
* Each actuator should be powered through its own COM COM
BRO
WHI
WHI
individual switch or relay contacts to prevent cross

G/F
feed between two or more actuators. 2

NC
3
NO
2
NC
3
NO
* In case of 3ph actuator, make sure to place

CLS 1 OLS 1
actuator on the middle of travel angle before MTP MTP COM COM
BASE
EARTH
electrical operation to avoid "Jamming" M HEATER
5W
* All internal wiring is done as color coding.
12
TYPICAL
TYPIC L WIRING (ICM2 for 3phase
3phase)
ICMQ0160-82500-F
PROPOSED ACTUATOR WIRING

CUSTOMER'S WIRING (I-TORK SUPPLY)
MAIN POWER PCM
AC 3PH( V) AC IN MOTOR
GRE CC BLU
R
PUR BLA
S
YEL RED
T
DC 24V
LOCAL OC
CONTROL
DISCRIMINATOR
POWER
GRE DC 24V
TRANSFORMER REMOTE
CONTROL
POWER
PHASE
AC 220V
SUPPLY CON 2 CON 1
9-5 CONNECTED
ICM
: MODULATING
CON 4 CON 5
9-5 DISCONNECTED
: MANUAL (ON-OFF)
CON 10
AUTO (RPC) GRE
COM
MANUAL
STOP (TYPE B)
YEL
OPEN
(TYPE A) ORA
CLOSE
(TYPE A) BRO
REMOTE CONTROL COM WHI

TORQUE & LIMIT SWITCHES
CON 9
PUR 2.N/C OLS 1.COM
CON 7
MONITOR COM BLA GRE
LOCAL BRO N/C CLS 1.COM
COM BLA 2.N/C
MONITOR
REMOTE RED N/O LOCAL / REMOTE RELAY RED
RELAY OPENING BLU N/O COM
BLU 2.N/C OTS 1.COM
DRY CONTACT
CLOSING N/O COM
OPENING RELAY
250VAC, 3A PUR
CLOSING RELAY WHI
FAULT GRY N/C CTS 1.COM
COM YEL 2.N/C
READY ORA N/O READY / FAULT RELAY BRO
ACLS COM RED

AUX.
FULL CLOSE ACLS NC ORA 2.N/C ACLS1
SWITCH 1.COM
250VAC, 10A ACLS NO PUR 3.N/C
AOLS COM BLU
AUX.
FULL OPEN AOLS NC BRO 2.N/C AOLS1
SWITCH 1.COM
250VAC, 10A AOLS NO GRE 3.N/C
CON 3
G/F HEATER
G/F
LOCAL / REMOTE / AUTO
NORMAL / REV
CLOSE / OPEN
POSITION
INPUT SIGNAL
O
OP
RE
CL
ST
M
C
OP
LO
E
CLOSE - OPEN LOCAL - STOP - REMOTE
IN
+ BLA
INPUT REMOTE
- WHI
SIGNAL POSITION FEED BACK
+
OUT CONTROLLER P.K POTENTIOMETER
BLA GRY
3
POSITION - ( RPC) P3
WHI
INDICATOR PUR
2
P2
ORA
1
P1
13
ITQ ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
ITQ Electric Actuator Standard selection guide for valves
Butterfly 2-Way Ball 3-Way Ball

Valve
valve 10K valve 10K valve 10K
Actuator ANSI 150# ANSI 150# ANSI 150#
ITQ 0100 100A (4") 40A (1 1/2") 40A (1 1/2")
ITQ 0160 125A (5") 50/65A (2”,2 1/2") 50/65A (2”,2 1/2")
ITQ 0240 150A (6") 80A (3") 80A (3")
ITQ 0350 200A (8") 100A (4")
ITQ 0500 250A (10") 125A (5") 100A (4")
ITQ 0800 300A (12") 150A (6") 125A (5")
ITQ 1100 350A (14")
ITQ 2000 450A (18") 250A (10") 200A (8")
ITQ 3000 500A (20”) 300A (12") 250A (10")
ITQ 6000 600/750A (24”,30") 350/400A (14",16") 300A (12")
ITQ 9000 800/900A (32”,36") 450/500A (18",20") 350A (14")
* The above table is just reference without I-TORK's responsibility.

* Actuator sizing must be done based on actual valve torque.
The details of this catalog are subject to change without prior notification.
®
CONTROLS Co., Ltd.
Website : http://www.i-tork.com
© I-TORK® Controls Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. ITQ-CA-1409

Motor Amp & Current
2020-11-24
110/50 110/60 220/50 220/60 380/50 380/60 440/50 440/60 DC

MODEL/VOLTAGE AMP
RATED/MAX RATED/MAX RATED/MAX RATED/MAX RATED/MAX RATED/MAX RATED/MAX RATED/MAX 1 TH 2 TH
ITQ-0100 15W 70F 0.98 / 1.38 1.10 / 1.49 0.52 / 0.79 0.58 / 0.83 0.23 / 0.36 0.24 / 0.36 0.26 / 0.40 0.28 / 0.41 4.5 -
ITQ-0160 1.60 / 2.49 1.70 / 2.62 0.85 / 1.18 0.90 / 1.23 0.30 / 0.66 0.30 / 0.65 0.30 / 0.76 0.32 / 0.72 - 1.9
40W 80F
ITQ-0240 1.62 / 2.49 1.72 / 2.62 0.87 / 1.18 0.90 / 1.23 0.32 / 0.66 0.32 / 0.65 0.32 / 0.76 0.35 / 0.82 - 2.4
ITQ-0350 40W 90F 1.72 / 3.16 1.80 / 3.16 0.92 / 1.52 0.95 / 1.51 0.32 / 0.85 0.32 / 0.82 0.32 / 0.97 0.35 / 0.91 - 4.3
ITQ-0500 90W 90F 3.60 / 5.32 3.90 / 5.44 1.50 / 2.55 1.60 / 2.58 0.52 / 1.40 0.56 / 1.35 0.55 / 1.67 0.58 / 1.50 350 - 5.4 800 - 5.0
ITQ-0800 3.90 / 7.92 4.20 / 7.92 2.05 / 4.14 2.20 / 4.07 0.82 / 1.94 0.88 / 1.85 0.82 / 2.18 0.88 / 2.07 5.5 7.0
180W 90F
ITQ-1100 3.90 / 7.92 4.30 / 7.92 2.15 / 4.14 2.30 / 4.07 0.84 / 1.94 0.90 / 1.85 0.84 / 2.18 0.88 / 2.07 7.1 -
ITQ-2000 6.0 / 13.2 3.3 / 8.25 2.2 / 8.25 1.59 / 2.1 1.38 / 1.8 2.28 / 3.0 1.62 / 2.1 - -
ITQ-3000 7.0 / 13.2 4.0 / 8.25 3.3 / 8.25 1.59 / 2.1 1.38 / 1.8 2.28 / 3.0 1.62 / 2.1 - -
400W 104F
ITQ-6000 6.0 / 13.2 3.3 / 8.25 2.2 / 8.25 1.59 / 2.1 1.38 / 1.8 2.28 / 3.0 1.62 / 2.1 - -
ITQ-9000 7.0 / 13.2 4.0 / 8.25 3.3 / 8.25 1.59 / 2.1 1.38 / 1.8 2.28 / 3.0 1.62 / 2.1 - -
Resistance Resistance Resistance

Motor Voltage Voltage Voltage
(OHM) (OHM) (OHM)
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph

Gray--White 57 Gray--White 175 Gray--White 985
10W 60F
Gray--Yellow 58 Gray--Red 175 Gray--Black 489
White--Yellow 115 White--Red 350 White--Black 495
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph
Black--Red 40 Black--Red 163 Black--Red 558
15W 70F
Black--Blue 40 Black--Blue 163 Black--Blue 558
Red--Blue 80 Red--Blue 327 Red--Blue 1116
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph
Black--Red 18 Black--Red 81 Black--Red 268
40W 80F
Black--Blue 18 Black--Blue 81 Black--Blue 268
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph
Black--Red 13.5 Black--Red 56 Black--Red 202
40W 90F
Black--Blue 13.5 Black--Blue 56 Black--Blue 202
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph
Black--Red 8.5 Black--Red 33 Black--Red 110
90W 90F
Black--Blue 8.5 Black--Blue 33 Black--Blue 110
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph
Black--Red 5 Black--Red 19.5 Black--Red 87
180W 90F
Black--Blue 5 Black--Blue 19.5 Black--Blue 87
110V 1Ph 220V 1Ph 380/440V 3Ph
Black--Red N/A Black--Red 9.4 Black--Red 43
400W 104F
Black--Blue N/A Black--Blue 9.6 Black--Blue 43.1
Red--Blue N/A Red--Blue 19.2 Red--Blue 43.2
ITQ ELECTRIC QUARTER TURN ACTUATOR
Installation and Operating Manual

(Doc no: ITQ-IMM-04-A)
(ITQ-0100, 0160, 0240, 0350, 0500, 0800

1100, 2000, 3000, 6000, 9000)
74-6, Chun Ui-Dong, Won Mi-Gu, Bucheon City, Kyoung Ki-Do, Korea
Tel : 82-2-855-1365, 66 Fax : 82-2-855-1367 E-mail : roy75@i-tork.com

Installation and operating manual (ITQ-IMM-04-A)
1
Table of Contents
1. Before operating actuator ……….. 3
2. About ITQ actuators …………… 4

1) External component 2) Internal component 5,6
3) Specification 4) Features & Structure 7,8
5) Mounting Base (ISO5211) 6) Removable drive bushing 9
3. Sizing and Application ……….. 12
4. Setting ……….. 13
1) Manual operation 2) Limit switches
3) Torque switches 4) Stopper bolts 14
5) Indicator
5. Location of actuator on the pipeline ………. 15

1) Location of actuator on the pipeline
2) Orientation of actuator
6. Electrical wiring ………. 16

1) Before wiring 2) Electrical wiring
3) Checking the rotating direction 4) Commissioning(Electrical)
of actuator
7. Others ………. 17
1) Jamming
2) Special tools for setting
8. Caution ………. 17
9. Trouble Shooting ………. 18
10. Maintenance ………. 18

1) Lubrication 3) Maintenance
2) Regular operation 4) Others

2
Many thanks for purchasing our ITQ series electric actuator!

For safe and proper operation, please carefully read this manual before using it and save it for
reference.
Important Note : The contents of this manual are subject to change without individual
notice .
1. Before using actuator
Please check individual test report, nameplate and electrical wiring (inside of actuator).
1) Visual Check : Painting, Indicator, Hand-Wheel etc
2) Specification: users may check test report and name plate to be sure actuator is suitable for
requirement specification of application
3) Optional Items : Check if all optional items are correct.
4) Check if electrical specification is correct (wiring diagram inside of the actuator, name plate).
5) Check if the electrical power is correct.
6) Check if instruction manual, test report (Warranty paper) and electrical wiring diagram are
supplied.
If there is any discrepancy, please ask local distributor of I-Tork controls Ltd to solve or replace
any discrepancy immediately.

3
2. About ITQ actuator

1) External components
ITQ0100 ~ ITQ3000

4
ITQ6000 ~ ITQ9000

5
2) Internal component
LIMIT SWITCH POTENTIOMETER
TERMINAL BLOCK ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY
MOTOR
TORQUE SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
ITQ0100 ~ ITQ3000
CAPACIT TERMINAL BLOCK POTENTIOMETER
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
TORQUE SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
MOTOR
LIMIT SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
ITQ6000 ~ ITQ9000

6
3) Specification(On-Off)
Enclosure Weather Proof enclosure IP67, NEMA 4 AND 4X, O-RING Sealed
Main power supply 110/220V AC 1Ph, 380/440V AC 3Ph 50/60Hz, 24V DC ±10%
Control power supply 110/220V AC 1Ph 50/60Hz, ±10%
Duty cycle(On-Off) S2, 20~50% Max 30Min
Duty cycle(Modulating) S4, 30~50%, 300 ~ 1,200 starts/hour
Motor Squirrel Caged Induction Motor
Limit switches OPEN/CLOSE, SPDT, 250V AC 10A RATING
Torque switches OPEN/CLOSE, SPDT, 250V AC 10A Rating(Except for ITQ0100)
Stall protection(Temp.) Built in thermal protection, OPEN 150℃±5℃/CLOSE 97℃±15℃
Travel angle 90˚±5˚(0˚~100˚)
Position indicator Plate with Indication Arrow
Manual override Declutch-able
Self locking Provided by double worm gears (No Brake)
Mechanical stopper 1 each for each travel end(OPEN and CLOSE), external adjustable
Heater 5W (110/220V AC) Anti-condensation
Cable entries 2- PF3/4” TAP (Option : 2-M25X1.5 for Europe, 2-NPT3/4” for America)
Lubrication EP Type grease
Terminal block Screw and Lever Push Type (Spring loaded)
Ambient temperature -20℃~+70℃(Except for optional electronic board)
Ambient humidity 90%RH Max, (Non-condensate)
Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1minute
Insulation resistance 500V DC 30M Ohm
Anti-vibration X Y Z 10g, 0.2~34Hz, 30minutes
External coating Dry powder (Polyester)
4) Features and structure
(1) General :
ITQ series actuator is designed for the 90 degree turn application such as damper, ball, plug,
butterfly valves and other equipment.
(2) Wide range of torque
Min. 100Nm to Max 9000Nm.
(3) Material
Material is hard-anodized AL alloy and external coating of epoxy powder is suitable for the severe
conditions especially against corrosion. Housing is designed in accordance with the standard of ex-
proof and IP67.

7
(4) Sealing
Sealing provided by double O-ring system
(5) Manual Override
Just by pulling the lever, operating mode is switched to manual. When supplying electrical power to
actuator, clutch is automatically disengaged from manual and operating mode is switched to electric
operation.
(6) Gear & Self locking
2nd staged Double worm gear prevents movement caused by backward force transferred from valve
provides an exact stable position of actuator and valve when electrical power is off.
High efficiency, low noise level and trouble free design are another advantage.
(7) Manual hand-wheel
The Size of hand wheel is designed according to required torque to move the actuator, so that
operator can easily move the actuator by hand.
(8) Motor
Motor specially designed for ITQ actuator has several features such as high output power, high
efficiency and thermostat installed inside of motor prevent from overheat of motor and thermal
damage of motor coil.
(9) Limit switch
Since limit switch is directly driven by the 2nd output shaft, position during operation is continuous
and accurate. Setting of Cam is so easy and once cam setting is done, position is almost permanent
unless operator changes setting again.
(10) Torque switch
Torque switch driven by the 2nd output drive shaft, the position during operation is continuous and
accurate. Torque spring which detects the variation of torque during operation is installed to prevent
damage of valve and actuator under overload condition.
Once actuator is under overload, torque switch is tripped and actuator stops immediately.
Switches are installed for both open and close directions.
This switches set by factory can not be set again without checking with factory.
(11) Space heater
Spacer heater is installed to prevent damage caused by condensed water inside of actuator and
includes internal thermostat inside to prevent overheating.
(12) Stopper bolt (Mechanical Travel Stops)
Stopper bolts installed for both close and open directions prevent actuator’s travel over the limit
during manual operation and also protect internal gearing disengagement.
(13) Indicator
Indicator directly driven by 2nd output drive shaft
Operator perceives exact current operating situation even from a distance.
(14) Terminal block
Spring loaded terminal strip protects vibration and provides for additional contacts.
(15) Wiring
Basic wiring is standardized to be simply and optimal, so that variation depending on electrical
specification and options can be so easy and simple.

8
(16) Adaption
Mounting base is designed according to ISO5211 but different dimension depending on application is
also possible. Removable drive bushing provides convenient custom machining.
(17) Lubrication
Actuator is lubricated with EP type Molly Grease, no need to field lubricates.
(18) Others
ITQ guaranty high performance, high quality product throughout various and severe test and
inspection.
5) Mounting Bases according to ISO5211 standard

9

10
Removable Drive Bushings for Adaption

11
3. Sizing and Application

VALVE BUTTERFLY BUTTERFLY 2-WAY BALL 2-WAY BALL 3-WAY BALL
VALVE 10K VALVE 20K VALVE 10K VALVE 20K VALVE 10K
ACTUATOR (ANSI 150#) (ANSI 300#)) (ANSI 150#) (ANSI 300#) (ANSI 150#)
ITQ-0100 100A(4”) 80A(3”) 40A 25A(1”) 40A(1 1/2”)
ITQ-0160 125A(5”) 100A(4”) 50/65A(2”/ 2 1/2”) 32/40A(1 1/4”/1 1/2”) 50/65A(2”/ 2 1/2”)
ITQ-0240 150A(6”) 125A(5”) 80A(3”) 50A(2”) 80A(3”)
ITQ-0350 200A(8”) 150A(6”) 100A(4”) 65/80A(2 1/2”/ 3”)
ITQ-0500 250A(10”) 200A(8”) 150A(6”) 125A(5”) 125A(5”)
ITQ-0800 300A(12”) 250A(10”) 150A(6”) 125A(5”) 125A(5”)
ITQ-1100 350A(14”) 300A(12”) 150A(6”)
ITQ-2000 450A(18”) 400A(16”) 250A(10”) 200A(8”) 200A(8”)
ITQ-3000 500A(20”) 450A(18”) 300A(12”) 250A(10”) 250A(10”)
ITQ-6000 600/750A(24”/30”) 500/600A(20”/24”) 350/400A(14”/16”) 300/350A(12”/14”) 300A(12”)
ITQ-9000 800/900A(32”/36”) 700/750A(28”/30”) 450/500A(18”/20”) 400/450A(16”/18”) 350A(14”)
Note :1. The above table just shows as a reference and no guaranty!
2. Sizing should be done after careful reviewing valve factory, temperature, characteristics of fluid and etc.
3. Review the application under the special conditions such as high and low temperature, seawater, severe
corrosion, high vibration, please consult with our technical dept before selecting actuator.
4. Decision by user ignoring our recommendation voids all factory warranties.

12
4. Setting
1) Manual Operation
① Pull the lever toward hand-wheel until lever moves perpendicular to pipeline.
② If lever does not move, try again while turning hand-wheel slowly.
③ There is a casting mark to indicate rotating direction on hand-wheel
④ Clockwise is the close direction and counter clockwise is the open direction.
⑤ There is no need to position the lever back to the original position for electrical operation.
⑥ Once electrical power is on, the lever will automatically return its original position by internal clutch
mechanism.
2) Limit Switch Setting
① Pull the lever for manual operation and turn hand-wheel to move actuator full close(Or open)
position
② Loosen the bolts tightening cam by L-wrench, and turn CLS (Or OLS) cam to CW (or to CCW), so
that cam may hit the lever of close (Or open) limit switch.
③ Then tighten the bolt by L-wrench
3) Torque Switches
Torque Switches are set by factory before delivery and therefore no need to set the switches again, to
check function:
① Push the lever of close switches by screw driver until it sounds “click” sound is heard, actuator
should stop immediately. If it stops, switch is functional.
② Check open switches as per just above.
③ There is no guaranty in performance if settings are changes.
④ Before changing setting, please consult with factory.

13
4) Stopper Bolt (Travel Stop) Setting

① Before manual operation, loosen both nuts and turn stopper bolt outward by 3 ~ 4 threads.
② Move actuator manually to full close position.
Once cam hit the lever of limit switch to trip, stop manual operation.
③ Then turn close stopper bolt inward until it stops (End of stopper bolt contacts the 2nd worm gear).
④ Turn close stopper bolt out by 2 threads and tighten the nut.
⑤ Repeat same above for open stopper bolt setting.
5) Indicator Setting
① Move actuator full close position and turn indicator by hand until orientation of indicator is aligned
to the figure of window.
② Tighten the bolt (Be careful not to be injured by the cutting edge of indicator and leakage of
electricity when power is on).
③ Figure of Window and indicator according to AWWA standard.
ITQ0100 ITQ0160~ITQ3000
ITQ6000~ITQ9000

14
5. Recommendation for installation of actuator in the pipeline

1) Location of actuator on the pipeline
2) Orientation of installation of actuator

① It is recommended to install actuator in the position where cable entry is bottom orientated for
watertight function and hand-wheel faces front for easy manual operation.
② Reserve the space for maintenance.

15
6. Electrical wiring
1) Before wring
① Cable entries are machined with PF3/4” (NPT3/4”, M20X1.5) tap and sealed by Plug before
delivery.
② Please retain any unused plugs for both cable entries.
③ Please make sure to seal the entries by using rubber or metallic packing after wiring, so that
water may not enter the actuator.
④ On ex-proof models, please make sure to use the certified connection component which is at
least same grade with actuator.
⑤ The certified connection component is not our scope of supply, but if user don’t use suitable
component, factory won’t guaranty the performance of ex-proof actuator.
2) Electrical wiring
① Check if electrical specifications like as power, wiring, etc are correct.
② A wiring diagram is supplied with actuator.
③ Wiring should be done as per the given wiring diagram, such as power, control power, internal
wiring and ground.
④ Make sure to supply electric power to heater for keeping inside of actuator clean and dry.
⑤ Make sure to check wiring to the terminal is secure.
⑥ Make sure that one relay operates one actuator only(Can not operate two or more
actuators simultaneously)
⑦ Make sure to clean inside of actuator and no foreign material inside.
3) Check rotating direction

① In 3 phase actuator, operator should check the rotating direction of actuator before electrical
operation.
② If operating direction is wrong, limit switches don’t function and will result in damage from
jamming or motor overheating.
③ Set the actuator at 50% open (or Close) position by manual operation and supply power to the
actuator and check it’s rotating direction.
④ If actuator moves open as per open signal, the direction it is O.K, but reverse, change the wiring.
⑤ Among 3 of power wires, change 2 wires each other.
⑥ Then check the rotating direction again in order to confirm.
4) Commissioning
① Make sure to check the rotating direction of actuator first before operation.
② Check the function of limit and torque switches, direction of indicator and space heater.
③ Check lever movement (Manual override)
④ Check the lamps in the control panel.
⑤ After commission, please make sure to tighten the 4 bolts of the top cover and to do proper
sealing.

16
7. Others
1) Jamming
① In case that actuator moves wrong direction and moves further beyond the travel limit, internal worm
gear contacts the stopper bolt and engaged each other. This is so call jamming and won’t move at all.
② How to solve
- Turn off power
- If jamming happens during close rotation, loosen stopper bolts take close by about 2 ~3 threads
- Pull the lever and put it manual position.
- Turn hand-wheel to counterclockwise until 50% open position.
- Check rotating direction again.
- If everything is O.K, put stopper bolt in original position.
- When jamming happens during open rotation, procedure is same as close, but turn hand-wheel to
clockwise by manual.
2) Special tools for setting
② L-Wrench 1 set(Metric)
③ Screw drivers (--, +)
④ Spanner set (Metric), Monkey spanner 200mm, 300mm 1 each,
⑤ Wire stripper, Long nose, Light
⑥ Multi Meter (AC, DC Volt, Resistance)
⑦ DC signal generator (0~4mA DC) : RPC option
⑧ mA DC Meter (0~25mA DC) : RPC and CT
8. Caution
① Selection of valve and actuator: Review all specification of valve and actuator carefully before
making selection and reserve about 30% torque of actuator for safety purpose. If required torque
is 90Kg-m, recommended actuator torque is about 117Kg-m.
② Option: Please consult with factory before making selection, if possible.
③ Before setting limit switch, please don’t operate actuator full open or full close.
④ After electrical wiring, make sure to secure the sealing of cable entries.
⑤ Before operating actuator, please review this manual carefully and follow the instruction without
fail. Please be careful at temperature, humidity, vibration, voltage drop.
⑥ Storage: Keep actuator dry, clean and cool.
⑦ Trouble shooting: Please refer to following trouble shooting but please don’t dismantle the
actuator without consulting with factory.
⑧ If repair or maintenance is required, please check the model, electrical condition, serial Number
and current situation to inform factory

17
9. Trouble Shooting
110/220 V AC 1Ph, 380~440 V AC 3Ph, 24 V DC
Trouble Cause Counter plan
Actuator Check if power is on Power on
doesn’t work Check if voltage is too low Check power
at all Motor and supplied power is different Check motor power and supplied power
Wiring is not correct and tight or loosen Do wiring again tightly
Coil of motor is damaged Replace the motor
Thermostat of motor trips Replace thermostat
Capacitor is damaged Replace the capacitor
Setting of limit and torque switch is not correct Do setting switches again
Jamming happens Check rotating direction per instruction
Torque switch Actuator is undersized Select again as per real require
open Foreign material between valve seat and disc Remove foreign material
Stopper bolt is set prior to limit switch Reset the stopper bolt
Switching to Lever is not fully pulled over Fully pull over the lever
manual is not Lever is not pulled over because of jamming Disengage the jamming
possible Clutch of lever and handle is engaged each other Turning handle slowly, pull over lever
Abnormal Damage of signal LED Replace the signal LED
signal Damage of micro switches Replace the micro switches
indicator Limit Switch Setting is wrong Reset switch
Stopper bolt is set prior to limit switch Reset stopper bolt
10. Maintenance
1) Lubrication
Lubrication is already done by factory and generally no need field lubricate.
In places such as very dry condition below R.H 15% or high temperature higher than 30oC, it is
required to lubricate every two years.
2) Regular operation
Electrical power always should be supplied to actuator and it is recommended to operate actuator
once a week.
3) Maintenance
Pleas check operating condition, corrosion, painting, etc at regular intervals.
4) Others
Should you have any further queries, please contact us through Phone, fax and E-mail without
hesitation.
18
home
alfa valves
products
technical information Alfa Valves supplies a full range of butterfly valves, compact in design and
streamlined disc design a high Kv/Cv values, low pressure loss and energy
contact cost.
The vulcanised bonded liner for longer lifetime, no corrosion between body
and liner Because of the limited number of parts our valves are
maintenance friendly and easy in use. A full range of Butterfly Valves are
available from DN 40 up to DN 1000 in series:
Wafer Type ALFA 57

Double Flange Type ALFA 46
Mono Type ALFA 60 (Short)
Mono Type ALFA 61 (Long)
Lug Type ALFA 64
1. TOPFLANGE
Actuation Flange according ISO 5211
2. VALVEBODY
3. DISC
Streamlined centric disc to reduce pressure loss and lower energy
costs available in several materials
4. LINER
Vulcanised Lining bonded to the Body, no corrosion between valve
body and liner for:
• Longer life time
• Suitable for dry conditions
• For end of line service
• Low torque
• No flange gaskets required
Available in several materials
5. SHAFT
Centric One piece shaft system, 100% bi-directional tight shut off
6. BEARING BUSH
Bronze bearing bush vulcanised to the liner.
No use of o-rings on the shaft
7. BEARING BUSH
Bronze bearing bush vulcanised to the liner.
No use of o-rings on the shaft
8. PIN
Cylindrical pin
9. STOP PLUG
To seal bottom side of the valve and to guide stem/shaft
sitemap | copyright © 2009 Alfa Europe

home
alfa valves
products
BODY MATERIALS
technical information
internally body is fully rubberlined and protected against corrosion
contact
Ductile Iron GGG40,DIN 1691 60-40-18,ASTM A536 400-18, BS 1452
Carbon Steel ASTM A216, GS-C 25, BS 1504
Stainless Steel 1.4408, A351-CF8M
Aluminium Bronze BS1400, ASTM B148 AB2, G-CuAl10Ni
Bronze Casting C-CuSn10Zn, DIN 1705 (RG10), ASTM B584 LG1
DISC
Ductile Iron 300 µm

EN 1563 EN-GJS-400-15
Rilsan coated
Aluminium Bronze BS1400,ASTM B148 AB2, G-CuAl10N
Stainless Steel (316) ASTM A743, 1.4408, A351-CF8M
Duplex ASTM A276, 1.4462.
Monel (K400) ASTM A494 M35
Other materials on request
SHAFT
Stainless Steel 1.4122

Duplex stainless steel 1.4462, SAF 2205
Monel(K500) BS3076. NA18
Aluminium Bronze ASTM B150, DIN17665
Other materials on request
LINERS
NBR Temp. 0-90°C

EPDM Temp -30 to 110°C
FPM (B) Temp 0 to 200°C
Other liner materials on request
PINS
Stainless Steel 1.4122

Monel (K500) BS3076, NA18
Stainless Steel (316L) 1.4404
Aluminium Bronze ASTM B150

home
alfa valves
products
ALFA Valves code Coating Layer thickness
technical information
A Coating system (Nibralux) a. Nibralux solid primer Bleu 15-25 micron
contact
b. Nibralux solid primer 35-40 micron
TDFT 50-65 micron
B Coating system (Ameron) a. Amerlock 2 C epoxyprimer 60 micron
b. Amerlock zinkepoxy 68G 50 micron

Amerlock 2C 150 micron
TDFT 200 micron
c. Amerlock 2C 100 micron
Amercoat 450 S 50 micron
TDFT 250 micron
d. Amerlock zink 68G 50 micron
Amercoat 450 S 50 micron
TDFT 200 micron
C Coating system (International) a. Intergard 475HS 60 micron
b. Interzinc 52 50 micron
Intergard 475HS 150 micron
TDFT 200 micron
c. Intergard 475 HS 100 micron
Intergard 475 HS 100 micron
Interfi ne 691 50 micron
TDFT 250 micron
c. Interzinc 52 100 micron
Intergard 475 HS 100 micron
Interfi ne 691 50 micron
TDFT 250 micron
D Coating system (Hempel) a. Hempadur primer 15300 60 micron
b. Hempadur primer 15300 100 micron

Hempadur Hi Build 45200 100 micron
TDFT 200 micron
c. Hempadur primer 15300 100 micron
Hempadur Hi Build 45200 100 micron
Hempathane 55210 50 micron
TDFT 250 micron

Doc. Seq. AT—T—07024
ALFA EUROPE BV Rev. Rev：01
Page Page：1 / 1
TORQUE TABLE OF CONCENTRIC RUBBERLINED BUTTERFLY VALVES
Status
△P (bar) PN-6 PN-10 PN-16 PN-20 PN-25
WP (bar) 2.5 bar 6 bar 2.5 bar 6 bar 10 bar 2.5 bar 6 bar 10 bar 16 bar 20 bar 25 bar
DN40 (1.5") - - - - - 7 8 9 10 12 15
DN50 (2") - - - - - 7 8 10 11 15 20
DN65 (2.5") - - - - - 8 9 12 15 20 25
DN80 (3") - - - - - 13 15 19 21 30 43
DN100 (4") - - - - - 18 23 28 35 50 62
DN125 (5") - - - - - 29 32 38 48 80 110
DN150 (6") - - - - - 55 65 75 85 135 180
DN200 (8") - - - - - 110 125 150 175 210 245
DN250 (10") 110 140 160 190 220 210 240 270 330 450 620
DN300 (12") 170 210 220 260 300 290 340 390 460 650 850
DN350 (14") 200 250 260 330 390 390 460 550 640 800 1100
DN400 (16") 300 380 460 540 640 670 760 860 1000 1550 2000
DN450 (18") 410 510 630 750 850 750 1000 1200 1400 2000 2500
DN500 (20") 540 670 800 900 1100 900 1200 1370 1710 2500 3500
DN550 (22") 680 880 1000 1200 1500 1600 1800 2000 2400 - -
DN600 (24") 910 1100 1330 1520 1805 2100 2280 2565 2945 - -
DN700 (28") 1500 1900 2250 2650 3050 3515 3895 4250 4940 - -
DN750 (30") 1800 2200 2500 3100 3500 4000 4500 4950 5700 - -
DN800 (32") 2100 2800 2920 3420 3920 4750 5225 5600 6500 - -
DN900 (36") 3300 4100 3880 4780 5500 5600 6400 7460 8560 - -
DN1000(40") 3800 4900 5510 6555 7695 8360 8800 9690 12350 - -
DN1100(44") - - - - - - - - - - -
DN1200(48") - - - - - - - - - - -
Note :1. The above torque values (N.M.) have included necessary safety factor from its normal application.
home
alfa valves
products Store the valve in dry, dark and cool conditions, preferably indoors with the actual valve temperature
technical information higher than 0°C. If outdoor storage is unavoidable, store the valves off the ground and protect the valves
with a watertight cover.
contact
Do not remove the valve packaging or end port protection, until necessary for inspection or installation.
Store the valve in the slightly open position to avoid permanent deformation of the rubber lining.
INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
1. Inspect the valve visually for damage or contamination during transport, handling and storage as
this could affect valve performance.
2. Carefully unpack the valve.
3. Check the tag plates, which should be attached on the valve.
4. Inspect the valve interior and lining. Valve interior shall be clean and free from foreign particles or
damage.
5. If possible, actuate the valve the complete open / close / open cycle to check the correct function.
Warning: Avoid contact with the valve disc.
6. Immediately prior to installation check the flanges to which the valve is to be fastened. The
flanges shall have a raised face or a flat face. The sealing face shall be flat, without burrs,
grooves, weld spatters, sharp edges and free from oil.
7. The inside diameter shall be large enough to accommodate the protrusion of the valve disc when
the valve is in the complete open position. The possibility of interference between disc and pipe
shall be checked and avoided.
8. Check the diameter of the raised face, stub end or equivalent of all pipe ends to ensure sufficient
face to face contact with the metal face of the valve.
INSTALLATION
Note: - New valves may not be installed with additional flange gaskets. The lining will seal against the
mating flange face.
As the valve is bi-directional tight shut off, the direction of installation is not dependent of the flow
direction.
When installed in a horizontal pipeline, valves larger than DN 300 should be installed with the
shaft positioned horizontally.
Option: Vertical shaft position on request (to be specified at order).
1. Weld the flange to the pipe so that the sealing faces are parallel.
Caution: Do not weld a connecting flange to the pipe with the valve installed! Doing so will
damage valve liner and valve will be useless!!
2. After cooling the flange, position the valve in the centre of the pipeline and with the shaft
horizontally if possible.
3. Tighten the bolts in a criss - cross fashion until the valve body (metal) touches the flange face. (do
not exceed the torque on the bolts as specified by the supplier of the bolts).
TESTING
1. Open and close the valve (preferably by hand)

slowly to ensure no disc interference with the pipe
work.
2. Clean the pipe interior with a rinsing fluid
compatible with the rubber lining and process.
3. Connect the actuator (if applicable) to the power
supply in accordance with the user manual of the
actuator.
4. Check the operation and tightness under working
conditions.
USER MANUAL
Click here to download the user manual.

User Manuel Alfa Series 46 / 57 / 64 / 60 / 61 / 66
Alfa 001 R2
www.alfa-europe.com 1 20 september 2010

Alfa 001 R2

Alfa 001 R2

Alfa 001 R2
Alfa Europe BV
Gildehauserweg 1
7581 PE Losser
T. +31 (0) 535360896
F. +31 (0) 535360851
Mob. +31 (0) 6 53459334

11 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
COMMISSIONING Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 11

CONTENTS
Doc. No. Description Enclosed
FFS-254 Installation confirmation before start-up and Commissioning 3 pgs
FFS-256 Start-up and Commissioning of Fi-Fi System 12 pgs
FFS-219 Summarised Fi-Fi System Operation 2 pgs

Written by: TN
Rev.03 / 20.06.2014
Installation confirmation before Start-up and Commissioning

Customer / ref.: Hull: IMO:
Supplier / ref.: ……………. Fire Fighting Systems
Responsible person by yard: Date: ___________
Return mail: ffs@fifisystems.com
This scheme is to be filled out by yard and returned to Fire Fighting Systems AS before the
commissioning engineer is leaving for Start-up and Commissioning. Items not included in our
scope of supply can be ignored. The installation must be done in accordance with FFS
instructions for the warrenty to be valid.
Status YES : 
CHECKPOINTS STATUS COMMENTS
Item 00 General
No visible transport damages
Fi-Fi piping system installed
Fi-Fi piping system pressure tested
Pump prime-mover installed
Item 01 Monitor
Monitor installed, pointing in the mid operating
Sector
Junction box connected acc. to drawing
Item 02 Control system

Cabinet and control panel installed
All wiring acc. to drawing
Contact for portable panel installed
BUS cable from cabinet to the panel installed
Door and cover plates put back or closed
Item 03 Foam proportioner

Proportioner installed with correct water direction
Foam pipe connected
Item 04 Foam pump

Foam pump installed
Power connected
Item 05 Water Spray system

System installed
Adjustable orifice installed

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 1 of 3
Written by: TN
Rev.03 / 20.06.2014
Item 06 Fi-Fi pump

Pump installed and fastened
Pump aligned acc. spec.
Item 07 Tooth coupling

Tooth coupling mounted
Alignment acc. to spec.
Filled with grease acc. to spec.
Item 08 Gearbox/Clutch
Gearbox/clutch is installed and fastened
Gearbox/clutch is aligned acc. to spec.
Junction box connected acc. to drawing
Cooling water for oil cooler connected NA for XP or XPC
Filled with oil acc. to spec.
Item 08 Diesel Engine

Engine installed and fastened
Cooling water lines installed acc. to spec.
Liquid filled with oil and coolant acc. to spec.
Fuel lines and wiring installed acc. To spec
Exhaust silencer/system installed
Item 08A Electric Motor

Insulation test FFS-532 performed and attached
All power connections tightened with torque
Earth cables and bonding installed
All cables/cords marked separately in each end
For safe identification. (ex: 690V, 440V)
Motor cover closed after installation work
Cable glans tightened and no open holes
Item 08 Electric Drives (Soft starter)

Insulation test FFS-532 performed and attached
All cables/cords marked separately in each end
For safe identification. (ex: 690V, 440V)
Soft starter cabinet is marked with the id of
Incoming circuit-breaker from ship supply
Door, cover plates and safety cover put back or
closed
Earth cables and bonding installed
All power connections tightened with torque
Cable glans tightened and no open holes

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 2 of 3
Written by: TN
Rev.03 / 20.06.2014
Item 09 Flexible coupling
Coupling mounted
Alignment acc. to spec.
Item 10 Valves
Valves installed & checked fully open+closed pos.
Wiring for end switches connected
Wiring for solenoids connected
Air supply/el. power for operation connected
Item 10 Priming Ejector

Ejector and air (alt. if appl. water) connected
Solenoids and wiring connected

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 3 of 3
Document No: FFS-256 Revision 08
Start-Up and commissioning of FI-FI system
Document no. : FFS -256 Document control
Version Description Written by Approved Date
08 General update Items 08&14 HMP RS 2017-01-13
00 First Release OIB/RS 2002-11-05
Customer / ref / Hull:
Fire Fighting Systems AS ref.:
Responsible person by yard:
Responsible person by supplier:
Date: Status OK : 
Installation before 1st start
Item 00 General
Details Port Stbd Comments
Piping system installed acc. to FFS drawings
Pump inlet valve is open (Bottom valve)
Pump outlet valve is closed (Discharge valve)
By-pass valve for “discharge valve” is open
Over board valve is closed
Water Spray System main valve is closed
Deck head main valve is closed
Item 01 Water / Foam monitor

Foundation – support/standpipe
Electrical connections – Glands tightened
Limit switches, end position – adjust sectors
Function test horizontal movement
Function test vertical movement
Automatically stop at end positions
Function test Fog / Jet nozzle or deflector
Function test Dual Flow system Clicking in valve when used

Electrical connections
Supply; 24V DC Measured : V DC
Supply Valves; 110 / 220V-1AC Measured : V 1 - AC
Supply Monitors; 220/400/415/440/460-3AC Measured : V 3 - AC

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 1 of 12
Adjust monitor motors elevation current Set at : A
Adjust monitor motors rotation current Set at : A
Control system “Ready for Fi-Fi”
Check the main valves end position indicators
Check 80% Load signal available
Check 100% Load signal available
Testing of the system without running engine
Testing Naut OSV functions
Item 03 Foam inductor / proportioner

Installation
Flow directions
Foam valve closed
Item 04 Foam pump

Installation
Foam Pump starter connected
Electrical connections
Adjust foam pump motor current Set at : A
Direction of rotation (see arrow on pump ) Check by bump starting motor
Inlet valve open
Outlet valve open
Foam tank is filled (-sea water for testing)
Item 05 Water Spray System

Installation in according to drawing
Main valve for the WSS is closed
Wheel house valve is closed
Recordings Port Stbd Comments

APR orifice adjusted according to Measured across outside
specifications. See piping drawing A= mm A= mm of APR
Item 06 Fi-Fi pump

Installation
Direction of rotation
Turn the pump by “hand check”
Loosen the gland nuts
Ensure air circulation for pump bearing
Ensure tension bolts for flexible bellows are
tightened

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 2 of 12
Item 07 Tooth coupling – Gearbox/Electric motor
Installation
Tooth coupling filled with grease
Alignment in according to specifications
Item 08 Gear box / Clutch unit

Installation
Oil level correct
Direction of rotation
Cooling water direction
Cooling water restriction (orifice) mounted External cooling only
(-is integrated in hose for FVIC-260)
Item 08 Electric motor

Electric power connections OK Used correct torque
Cable glands/MCT connections OK
Electric Motor mounting Vertical / Horisontal
Water cooling for motor connected
Air cooling for motor
Water Leak Sensor connected
Temperature Sensors PTC connected 145 C
Temperature Sensors PT100 connected
Temperature Sensors PT100 for
DE (drive end) connected
Temperature Sensors PT100 for
NDE (non drive end) connected
Alarms bridge/MP177 when tripping
Motor protector
Alarms bridge/MP177 when simulating
High temperature in motor

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 3 of 12
Item 08 Soft starter

Electric power connections OK Used correct torque
Cable glands/MCT connections OK
Temperature Sensors PT100 connected
Test remote start
Test remote stop
Test local start
Test local stop
Test Emergency Stop From Control system
Test Emergency Stop At pump skid
Test Local Emergency Stop In starter door
Item 08 Diesel engine

Liquid filled with oil and coolant acc. to
spec.
Fuel lines and wiring installed acc. to
spec
Exhaust silencer/system installed
Engine/skid fastened acc. to spec.
Starting system/supply installed acc. to
spec
Item 08 Reporting
Item 09 Flexible coupling

Installation
Alignment in acc. to specifications
Item 10 Valves
Installation acc. to FFS drawings
Control the position of the valves before start
Electric connections
Air connections
Hydraulic connections

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 4 of 12
Item 10 Ejector – Remote type ( Vatec )

Installation according to Ejector supplier Ejector must be above wanted
documentation pump liquid level
Electric connections
Air connections
Item 13 Deck head

Installation
Closed valves
Inspection during the 1st running
Item 01 Water / foam monitor

Function test horizontal movement
Function test vertical movement
Automatically stop at end positions
Function test Fog / Jet nozzle or deflector
Function test Dual Flow
No leakage
Sufficient throw length / height
Item 01Recording
Serial number
Monitor inlet pressure [bar]
Throw length [m]
Item 01 Reporting

Check for alarms Up/Down Monitor
Check for alarms Left / Right Monitor
Functional testing
Item 02 Reporting

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 5 of 12
Item 03 Foam inductor / proportioner

Check for leakage ( 1 drop a second )
Item 03 Reporting
Item 04 Foam pump

Details Duration Status Comments
Test local Start/Stop of pump
Check for excessive vibrations
Check for leakage
Foam consumption
Discharge pressure
Item 04 Recording
Serial number
Pump Pressure [bar]
Item 04 Reporting
Item 05 Water Spray System

Balancing the system
Adjust the nozzles
Item 05 Recording
Pressure after APR
Item 05 Reporting

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 6 of 12
Item 06 Fi-Fi pump

Control leakage from the stuffing box. Not XP
Tighten the gland nuts to ensure 45-60 drops Not bell housing
of water per minute
Check bearing temperature max 90deg
Item 06 Recording
Serial number
Discharge pressure [bar]
Suction pressure [bar]
Item 06 Reporting
Item 08 Gear box / Clutch unit

Check for leakage from fittings, shaft seals
Alarms bridge/MP177 when removing
contacts Temp switches
contacts Clutch oil switches
contacts Gearbox oil switches
Item 08 Recording
Serial number
System pressure [bar]
Clutch oil pressure [bar]
Oil temperature [°C]
Item 08 Electric motor

Temperature when running
Item 08 Recording
Serial number
Current from motor plate
Power in kw from motor plate
Temperature winding Degrees
Temperature bearings DE Degrees

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 7 of 12
Temperature bearings NDE Degrees
Item 08 Soft starter

Check for excessive noise From contactors
Item 08 Recording
Supplier
Serial number
Temperature when running
Item 08 Diesel engine

Start/Speed/ramp behaviour normal
Oil pressure normal and stable
Temperature when stable running at
nom. load
Item 08 Recording
Serial number
Oil temperature Degrees C
Coolant temperature Degrees C
Charge air pressure kPa/psi/bar
Engine load at pump duty point %
Item 08 Reporting
Item 07/09 Couplings

Temperature stabilized
Item 07/09 Reporting

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 8 of 12
Item 10 Valves
Check for leakage
Operation
Item 10 Reporting
Item 10 Ejector – Remote type ( Vatec )

Check for leakage
Operation
Item 10 Recording
Type number
Serial number
Item 10 Reporting
Item 13 Deck head

Visual flow test
Check for leakage
Item 13 Reporting
Item 14 Foam generator

Visual flow test vs. known
volume(eg.container), scaled to spec.
Check for leakage
Item 14 Reporting

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 9 of 12
Inspection after test run
Item 00 General
Control the alignment of gear/clutch & pump
Start the system – general description

1. Control panel Power on
2. 1) Open the Fi-Fi Pump inlet valve (Suction valve)
2) Close the Fi-Fi Pump outlet valve (Discharge valve)
3) Open the By-pass valve for the discharge valve
4) Close the Water Spray System main valve
5) Close the Deck Head main valve
6) Close the Over Board valve
7) Open the Foam Pump inlet valve (Suction valve)
8) Close the Foam Pump outlet valve (Discharge valve)
3. 1) Insert portable panel to wall plug (if supplied)

2) Switch panel operation from Stand-By to ON
3) Ensure no alarms on Fi-Fi panel
4) Check the lamp on panel “Ready for Fi-Fi” is ON
5) Check the Engine speed is correct (idle speed recommended)
6) Engage the Fi-Fi pump by the clutch IN/OUT switch
7) Wait until the water flows out of the monitor
8) Open the Fi-Fi pump Discharge valve from control panel, (note the 2min interlock delay)
9) Operate the monitors by Joy-stick and buttons for Fog/Jet or Dual flow.
4. 1) Open the main valve for water spray system

2) Open the valve for the nozzles on the wheelhouse
5. 1) Start the Foam Pump
2) Open the foam pump discharge valve within maximum 30 sec.
Stop the system

1. 1) Close the Foam pump Discharge valve
2) Stop the Foam Pump
2. Close the valve for the Water Spray System
3.. 1) Close the Fi-Fi pump discharge valve
2) Disengage the Fi-Fi clutch
4. Drain the system

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 10 of 12
Commissioning approval Date: __________
Customer reference: __________________________________________
Fire Fighting Systems AS reference: __________________________________________
Signature of Classification society: _________________________________
Signature of Yard: _________________________________
Signature of Owner: _________________________________
Signature of Fire Fighting Systems AS: _________________________________
Outstanding

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 11 of 12

Tykkemyr 27 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Page 12 of 12
Operation
Instructions
Sheet No: FFS219
FFS600LB_Fi_ev
SUMMARISED FI-FI SYSTEM OPERATION (See User manual for details)
Start Monitors Stop Monitors
1. Switch panel “System Operation” to “ON” 1. Adjust the pump speed to idling speed if possible
2. Open Fi-Fi pump Suction valve 2. Close Fi-Fi pump discharge valve
Close Fi-Fi pump Discharge valve 3. Stop the pump by pressing the “clutch out” button
Open by-pass Discharge valve from the control panel
Open overboard valve
4. Switch panel operation to “Stand-by”
3. Make sure “Ready for Fi-Fi” lamp on panel is
illuminated
4. Start the Fi-Fi pump by pressing the “clutch in”
button from the control panel
Start Foam injection
Start at idling speed is recommended
1. Make sure Fi-Fi pump is running and water is
5. Wait until the water flows out of the monitors
running out of the monitor in Foam mode or
6. Open Fi-Fi pump discharge valve from control REDUCED capacity (if applicable)
panel, please note the 2 min interlock delay
2. Open Foam/water valve
7. Operate monitor by using Joystick, Fog/Jet
3. Close Discharge valve
and Foam/Water switches (if applicable)
4. Close By-pass valve
5. Open Foam tank valve
6. Open Foam inductor valve
7. Stop by reversing the procedure
Draining CAUTION !
1. Open all valves for the Fi-Fi system 1. Do not aim the water jet towards persons
2. Close Fi-Fi pump Suction valve after ~10s 2. Risk of squeezing by the monitor
3. Drain the pump casing 3. Never start pumps with open discharge valves
4. Never run pumps dry
5. Pump operation without cooling flow max. 30s
6. Never exceed capacity duty point of pumps

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
Operation
Instructions
Sheet No: FFS219
FFS600LB_Fi_ev
Typical Fi-Fi piping arrangements (See User manual for details)
Around discharge valve inline inductor

Box 369 Fax: +47 69 24 49 95
12 Rev Date: 07/03/2023
CERTIFICATES Prep. By: RTE
Sheet no.: 1
MM001/002/003/004,

PROJECT ITEM NO. 12

CONTENTS
Doc. No. Description Enclosed
TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATES FOR REFERENCE
22611/C1 BV BV (19.08.25) Type Approval Certificate 4 pgs

Fire Fighting Monitor (FFS 600LB)
19.10022.262 RMRS (15.05.24) Type Approval Certificate 2 pgs

Foam Inductor (FFS-600FiA)
NP20PPP01387 CCS 24.07.20 Plan Approval Comments 3 pgs

Fire Fighting Pump (SFP150x200XP)
YY-4364407 ABS (10.04.25) Certificate of Manufacturing Assessment 1 pg

Alfa Valve (S64 -Lug type, S57 - Wafer type)
21.10643.272 RMRS (03.06.26) Type Approval Certificate 4 pgs

Elaflex Bellow ERV-GS (DN150)
!B@.
Page.
1/2
6.8.3
swidetelxstwo o tipowom odobrenii

TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
iZGOTOWITELX
Manufacturer Fire Fighting Systems AS (Holder of Certificate) / Держатель Свидетельства
aDRES
Address Head Office / Главный офис: Tykkemyr 27, N-1597 Moss / г. Мосс, Norway / Норвегия
Factory / Производство: Fire Fighting Systems Sweden AB
Industrigatan 22, SE-662 34 Amal /г.Амал, Sweden / Швеция
iZDELIE*
Product*
Смесители систем пенотушения / Foam Inductors

Типы / Types: FFS-300Fi, FFS-300FiA, FFS-600Fi и/and FFS-600FiA
kOD NOMENKLATURY
Code of nomenclature 06050800
nA OSNOWANII OSWIDETELXSTWOWANIQ I PROWEDENNYH ISPYTANIJ UDOSTOWERQETSQ, ^TO WY[E-

UPOMQNUTOE(YE) IZDELIE(Q) UDOWLETWORQET(@T) TREBOWANIQM rOSSIJSKOGO MORSKOGO REGISTRA SUDOHODSTWA.
This is to certify that on the basis of the survey and tests carried out the above mentioned item(s) complies(ly) with the
requirements of Russian Maritime Register of Shipping.
Части VI Правил классификации и постройки морских судов, изд.2019;
Правилу 10 Главы II-2 Международной Конвенции СОЛ АС-74 с Поправками 2014 г.;
п.2.3 Главы 6 Международного Кодекса по системам противопожарной безопасности (Рез.ИМО MSC.98(73)) / Part VI of Rules
for the classification and construction of sea-going ships, edition 2019;
Regulation 10 of Chapter II-2 of International Convention SOLAS-74 as amended in 2014; cl.2.3 of Chapter 6 of International Code for
Fire Safety System (IMO Res.MSC.98(73)).
nASTOQ]EE sWIDETELXSTWO O TIPOWOM ODOBRENII DEJSTWITELXNO DO
This Type Approval Certificate is valid until 15.05.2024
nASTOQ]EE sWIDETELXSTWO O TIPOWOM ODOBRENII TERQET SILU W SLUÂQH, USTANOWLENNYH W pRAWILAH

TEHNIÊSKOGO NABL@DENIQ ZA POSTROJKOJ SUDOW I IZGOTOWLENIEM MATERIALOW I IZDELIJ DLQ SUDOW.
This Type Approval Certificate becomes invalid in cases stipulated in Rules for the Technical Supervision during
Construction of Ships and Manufacture of Shipboard Materials and Products.
dATA WYDAÎ " 19.10022.262

Date of issue 15.05.2019
rOSSIJSKIJ MORSKOJ REGISTR SUDOHODSTWA
V.Terekhov / Терехов В.Ю.
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
m.p. ( PODPISX
)
signature ( FAMILIQ,
name
INICIALY
)
L.S.
*dOPOLNITELXNU@ INFORMACI@ SMOTRI NA OBOROTE.
Additional information see overleaf.
!B@.
Page. 2/2
tEHNIÊSKIE DANNYE
Technical data
Тип / Type: FFS-300Fi FFS-300FiA

Номинальная подача воды, мЗ/ч /
Nominal capacity of water, тЗ/h: 300 300
Номинальная подача пенообразователя, мЗ/ч /
Nominal capacity of foam liquid, m3/h: 9 0- 18
Номинальная высоса всасывания пенообразователя, м/
Nominal suction height of foam liquid, m: 3 3
Кратность ценообразования /
Mixing ratio: 3% 0-6 % (регулируемая/adjustable)
Тип / Type: FFS-600Fi FFS-600FiA

Номинальная подача воды, мЗ/ч /
Nominal capacity of water, тЗ/h: 600 600
Номинальная подача пенообразователя, мЗ/ч /
Nominal capacity of foam liquid, тЗ/h: 18 0-18
Номинальная высоси всасывания пенообразователя, м/
Nominal suction height of foam liquid, m: 3 3
Кратность ценообразования /
Mixing ratio: 3% 0-3 % (регулируемая/adjustable)
tEHNIÊSKAQ DOKUMENTACIQ I DATA EE ODOBRENIQ rOSSIJSKIM MORSKIM REGISTROM SUDOHODSTWA

Technical documentation and the date of its approval by Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Техническая документация одобрена Представительством Российского морского регистра судоходства в Швеции (письмо .
262-381-124-130733 от 15.05.2019 ).
The technical documentation has been approved by the Representation of the Russian Maritime Register of Shipping in Sweden (Letter
ref no.262-381-124-130733 dd.15.05.2019).
oBRAZEC IZDELIQ ISPYTAN POD TEHNIÊSKIM NABL@DENIEM rOSSIJSKOGO MORSKOGO REGISTRA SUDOHODSTWA.
Product's specimen has been tested under the technical supervision of Russian Maritime Register of Shipping.
aKT " 19.00545.262 OT 15.05.2019

Report No. of
oBLASTX PRIMENENIQ I OGRANIÊNIQ

Application and limitations
Для использования в системах пенотушения морских судов и плавучих сооружений/ For application in fire fighting
foam systems of sea-going ships and floating facilities.
wID DOKUMENTA, WYDAWAEMOGO NA IZDELIE

Type of document issued for product
Изделия должны поставляться с копией настоящего Свидетельства о типовом одобрении / The
products should be delivered with copy of this Type Approval Certificate.
06/2015
19.10022.262
CHINA CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY
Plan Approval Comments
Page: 1/3
Approval No.: NP20PPP01387
Attn to : Fire Fighting Systems AS

Copy to: CCS Bergen Office
This is to certify that the drawings and documents submitted by your kind company have
been reviewed and are found to comply with the relevant CCS requirements in item No.3. This
approval covers only applicable CCS requirements to the products. Please see comments in item
No.4 if any.
1. Product particulars:
Product: Fi-Fi Pump w/Clutch
Type: SFP 150x200XP
Max nom. Capacity: 600 m3/h at 135m
Max nom. Torque in: 1790 Nm
Technical data: refer to approved drawings.
2. Intended for:
Marine application.
3. Rules and /or Standard:

Chapter 2, Part Three of China Classification Society Rules for Classification of Sea-Going Steel
Ships 2018 and its Amendments.
4. Comments:
/
5. Remarks:
/
6. Attachment:
Return list for drawings/documents of products.
Page: 2/3
Examined by : Zhang Bo Approved by:Feng Jianchun

Issued by : CCS Product Plan Approval Center
Date of issue : 2020-07-24
Page: 3/3
RETURN LIST FOR DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS OF PRODUCTS
Product: Fi-Fi Pump w/Clutch

Drawings/
No. Title Approved Noted Comment
Documents No.
1 Pump Unit Main Assembly 608A-22 ╳
2 Calculation of a Helical
SFP150x200XP-B ╳
Gear Pair
3 Pump Performance Curve SFP 150x200 ╳
4 SFP150x200XP Mech. El.

FFS-670 ╳
Inspection FAT
5 SFP150x200XP Datasheet Fi-
FFS-657 ╳
Fi Pump w/clutch
6 Clutch 777-02454 4009095 ╳
7 Pump Shaft w/pipe 150XP 4008876 ╳
8 Wheel Input Ratio B 4008867-02 ╳
9 Wheel Ratio B 4008860-02 ╳
10 Pump Shaft 150XP 4008855 ╳
11 150XP Main Assembly 4008800 ╳
12 Input Shaft 150XP 4008710 ╳
13 150XP Input Shaft 4008709 ╳
14 Pump Shaft Assembly-B 4008696 ╳
15 Oil System Sheme 4007724-H1 ╳
16 Electric System Sheme 4007724-C1 ╳
17 Transmission Assembly 4007724 ╳
18 Hydraulic Block Preassembly 618A-2045 ╳

Note: Mark of "×"in the column of "Approved" or "Noted" indicates that the drawing or document has been
approved or noted by CCS, "Comment" indicates that there is comment on the drawing or document.
Crp.
POCCMMCKMH MOPCKOH PEfHCTP CYJlOXOJlCTBA Page. I /4
RUSSIAN MARITIME REGISTER OF SHIPPING 6.8.3
CBH,[(ETEJihCTBO O THIIOBOM O,[(OliPEHHH

TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
1'broTOB11TeJ1b
Manufacturer ELAFLEX HIBY GmbH & Co.KG (VAT: DE187477901)
A,upec
Address 121, Sch11ackenburgallee, 22525, Hamburg, Ge1'ma11y
l,h.nen11e*
Product*
Pe3uH08111e aumuou6pau,uo11111,1e 1caAmeucamop111 munoB ERV-G, ERV-G LT, ERV-CR, ERV-R, ERV-GS, ERV-GS HNBR.
Rubber Expansion Joi11ts types ERV-G, ERV-G LT, ERV-CR, ERV-R, ERV-GS, EllV-GS HNBR.
~o.n ll~MeHKJlaTypbl 08030720

Code ol nomenclature
Ha OCHOB81JMM OCBH)leTeJ!bCTBOBHIIMH 11 npoae.neHHbIX MCOh!TallHH y.nocTOBep.sreTCH , '!TO Bb!We-

YIIOMHllyTOe(ble) 113.nemre(.sr) y.noBJICTBOp.sreT(.EOT) Tpe6onamrnM PoCCHHCKOro MOpCKOro perncTpa cy.uoxo.ncrna .
This is to certify that on the basis of the survey and tests canied out the above mentioned item(s) complies(ly) with the
requirements of Russian Maritime Register of Shipping.
'lacmu Vlll, "llpao1111 KJ1UCCll<pUKa1411u u nocmpo11KU MOpCKIIX cyiJoo" U30. 2020;
'lacmu IV, "Tlpaeun mex11u.,ecK020 ua6moiJemm 3a nocmpoiiK011 cyiJotJ u uJZomoone11u~, Mamepuanoo u u3iJenuii OJIIJ cyiJoe" UJO.
2020;
Part VI II of the "Rules for the Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships" ed. 2020;
Part IV of the "Rules for Teclinical Supervision during Construction of Ships and Mat1uft1ct11re ofMaterials and Products for Ships" ed.
2020;
Hacro.sriuee CBH,UeTCJlhCTBO O THTIOBOM o,uo6peIIMH .aeHCTBHTeJlbllO ,uo

This Type Approval Certificate is vat.id until 03.06.2026
HacTO}llUCe CBH,UeTeJibCTBO O Tl1 □ 0BOM o.no6pemm TepneT CMJIY 8 CJIY'l8HX, ycTaHOBneHHbIX B I1pamrnax
Tex1-urqecKoro Ha6n.EO,llCHFl.ll 3a TIOCTpOHKOW cy,LIOB 11 113l'OTOBJ1eHMeM MaTep11aJIOB J,j H3,UenHH. ,llJJll cy,uoo.
This Type Approval Certificate becomes invalid in cases stipulated in Rules for the Technical Supervision during
Construction of Ships and Manufacture of Shipboard Materials and Products.
,[{aTa Bbl.Ll3'1H
Date of issue 03.06.2021
Pocc11ftcKm1 MOpcKOft pentcrp '

JlzoiJuu A.H. /A. Ya.l{odi11
Russian Maritime Register of S
( (paMHJJ H!!, HIDIUHam,1)
name
• ,ll,onoJJHl!TeJJbHYIO 111-1(1/0pM·
Additiona l information see
2 14
Texm1•1eCKHe ,LiaHHble
Technical data
CM, npunoJH:eHue Ha cmp. 3, 4
please see annex on p.3, 4
Texm-1qecKa51 /l0KyMeHTaUIHI H ,ll,aTa ee 0/lO0peHIIll PoCCHHCKHM M0pCKHM perrrCTp0M cy,uoX0/lCTBa

Technical documentation and the date of its approval by Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
Tex1m'lec1<aH iJ0Ky1tte11mm4uH Elaflex "Rubber Expansion Joints Catalogue -Group 4, Vebersicl1t I produktprogramm rohrverbinder ERV
Slip-on oiJ06pe11a PC nucbMOM 272-313-1-2375 om 11.01.2021. flpozpa~ma ucm,1ma11ut'i om 05.2021 oiJ06pe11a PC nuc1,111OM
272-313-1-129290 om 21.05.2021.
Teclmical documentation Elaflex "Rubber Expansion Joints Catalogue -Group 4, Vebersicht I produktprogramm rohrverbinder ERV
Slip-on approved by letter 272-313-1-2375 dated I 1.01.2021. Test programfrom 05.2021 approved by RS by letter 272-313-1-129290
dated 21.05.2021.
O6pa3e.u: H3)lemrn ucnuITaH TI0/l Tex1-mqecKI1M Ha6mo,[(eH11eM PoccuilcKoro MopcKoro perucTpa cy,uoxo,ncTBa .
Product's specimen has been tested under the technical supervision of Russian Maritime Register of Shipping.
AKT Ng 21.10642.272 OT 03.06.2021

Report No. or
O6JiaCTb npHMeHeim}I 11 orpaHH'IeHIUl
Application and limitations
Ilpei>Ha3Hattem,t OllH ucnollb30BauuH s cyooar,,x cucmeMax Ha 11ropcKux cyoax, nnaB)"-'UX coopyJ{(eHUHx, cmau,uouapubtX
nnamif,opMax.
Intended for use in ships systems on sea-going ships, floating facilities and fixed offshore platfornis.
BM)..( ,LI,0KyMeHTa, Bh1,nasaeMoro ua 113.uem1e

Type of document issued for product
- MC - ~OKJMettm, oif,opM!lReMbtll UJzomosumeneM
The document drawn up by the Manufacturer.
06/2015
21.10643.272
C-rp.
Page.
3 /4
DPIIJJO)KEHIIE
ANNEX
K Cs11)],ere11bcTBy o Tlli10BOM o/J,06peH1111 N2 21.10643.272
to the Type Approval Certificate No.
ERV-R ERV-CR ERV-G ERV-G LT ERV-GS ERVGS HNBR

Pa6o4aR BOAa, nHTbeBaA XO/lOAJ-JaR H npOAYKTbl Ha npOAYKTbl Ha n POAYKTbl Ha
cpeAa 00.0,a, TennaA BOAa, OCHOBe He<j)TH npH Hl-l3KHX OCHOBe He<j)TH, OCHOBe He!pTH
XO/lOAHble H BOAa C TeMnepaTYpax Tonm,so , TOn/lHBO DIN
TennbIe nnae,nenbHoro COAep>1<aH1-1eM MR DIN EN c EN c
CT04Hble BOAbl, 6acceMtta, apOMaTH4eCKH c:ra HAapTH blX COAep>1<aH11eM COAep>1<aHHeM
MOpCKaA BOAa, MOpcKaR BOAa, X sew,ec:rB AO n POAYKTOB Ha apoMaTHYecK1-1 apoMan1YeCKH
0Xl1a)f(Aa10111a11 CT04Hble BOAbl 50%, TOnm,00 OCHOBe 1-1e<j)TH, x ee111eCTB AO X BelJ.1eCTB AO
BOAa, a TaK>Ke C (c11a60K1<C/1ble (COAep>1<aHHe Hanp1-1Mep 50%, 50%,
XMMH4eCKI-IMM 1-1/11-1 lJ.1el104Hble}, 3TaHona pp 85 AH3e/1bHOro ox11a>1<Aatow,a11 ox11a>1<Aatow,a11
A06aBKaMM MA TaK>1<e %), TOnm,sa, BOAa C BOAa C
04"1CTK"1 BOAbl, COAep>1<alJ.1Me aB"13l,\HOHHOe TOn04HOro MaC/lAHI-ICTblM MaC/1AH"1CTblM
Hl-l3KOKOHl,\ei-lTp Maeno, TOn/l~BO, Ma3y-Ta .o,o+
1-1poBaHHble 0Xl1a>1<Aatow,a11 ropOACl<OM ra3 90" C,
"
aHTMKOpp03HO
"aHTHKOpp031-10
KHC/10Tbl 1-1 BOAa C 1-1 np1-1 POAHblM aaHal.\"10HHoro HHblMH HHblM"1
w,e110Y11, 3alJ.1HTHblMH ra3, 3a TOn11110a, np1,1caAKaM1-1, npHcaAKaMH,
pacr0opbI MacnaMM OT '1CK/ll04eH1-1eM He!pTM AO+ CMa304HOe M CMa304HOe 1-1
coneM, K0pp03HM, C>KH>KeHHOfO 60° C" ri,,Apa 0111,14ecK r11Apa0111,14ecK
TeXHH4eCKHe CMa304HOe HecjJTRHOrO 6eH3>Uia AO + oe Macno, oe
cnMpTbl, Maeno, cMa3Ka M ra3a 40° C. MOpCKaA BOAa. Maeno,
C/10>l(Hble B03AVX, C>KaTblM MOpCKaA BOAa
3!pHpbl "1 B03AVX
KeTOHbl
BcraaKa: 5y-T"1JlOBaA IIR / XnoponpeH CR, NBR (HHTp1111), NBR {HvtTpHn), NBR (HHTP"111), NBR (HHTPHll),
EPDM, 6ecwo0Ha11, 6ecwoaHaA, 6ecwoeHaR, 6ecWOBHble, 6ecwoeHaR,
6ecwoaHaR, c 1131-1ocoCToMKa11 113HOCOCTOMKa ~3HOCOCTOHKa '13HOCOCTO>tKa BblCOKaR
H'13KOM R A, MR H"13Kl1X R 113HOCOCTOMKO
npOHl1l,\aeMOCTb reMnepaTYP CTb
IO
ApMHpDB3H11 TeKCT"1/lbHbl'1 TeKCTl1J1bHblM TeKCT'1/lbHbl'1 reKCTHJ1bHb1'1 CTa/lbHOM CTa/lbHOM
e: WHyp WHYP WHYP WHYP npOB0/104HblM npoeono4HblM
WHYP WHYP
TeMnepaTYPH Or-40" CAO+ OT -25° c AO + 90• OT- 20" CAO+ OT-40° CAO+ OT OT-20° C OT- 35° CAO+
blM A11ana30H 100° C, C, epeMeHHO AO + 90' C 90° C, AO+ 90 ° C, 100° C,
(a speMeHHO 100" C apeMeHHO AO epeMeHHO epeMeHHO AO BpeMeHHO AO
3aBl101MOCTl-1 AO+ 120" C + 100' C AO+ 100" C + 100 • C. + 120° C.
OT cpe.O,bl) On-teCTOi:iKOCT 0n-teCTOi:1KOCT
b no ISO 15540 b no ISO 15540
AO AO 30Ml1H.
30 MHH. 11 npH npH + 800" C
+800" c.
n0Kpb1T1-1e EPDM, XnoponpeH CR XnoponpeH CR XnoponpeH CR XnoponpeH CR XnoponpeH CR
030HOCTOHK~~,
TepMOCTOHKl1M
HOMMHaJlbHblH AMaMeTp DN, MM: OT 25 AO 1000
AllHH3, MM: OT 130 AO 300
HoM11Ha11b1-1oe Aae11eH1-1e PN, Mna: AD 1,6
(!)11aHl,\bl: noeopOTHble, DIN PN 10/16, yrnepOAHCTaR CTaJlb, OL\HHKOBaHHble, Hep>1<a0e10w,a11 CTaJlb, /laTYHb, 6pOH3a
noAP06Hb1e TexH11YecK1-1e AaHHble 11 pa3MepbI CM. Elaflex "Rubber Expansion Joints Catalogue - Group 4"
Pocc11i1cKm'i M0{ICK0H perncTp cy.ll0XO.llCTBa JlzoiJuu A.11. /A. YaKodin

Russian Maritime Register of Shipping -#,,,__,,l>-'-r-<='--.......;=-::._._,__,,,.,.,,,~-...-.=c.. .,c. .- """=---
( tjl:JMHJll1H, HH111\lfaJlhT)
name
4 14
IIPHJIO)KEHHE
ANNEX
K CBH/J,ereJJbCTBY o ninoeoM O/J,06pem111 N2 21.10643.272
to the Type Approval Certificate No.
ERV-R ERV-CR ERV-G ERV-G LT ERV-GS ERV GS HNBR

Working water, drinking, cold and warm petroleum low petroleum petroleum
medium cold and warm water, based temperature based products, based
waste water, swimming pool products with applications for DIN EN fuels up products, DIN
seawater, water, sea aromatic standard- to 50% EN fuels up to
cooling water, water, waste content up to conform aromatic SO% aromatic
also with water (weakly 50%, fuels ( petroleum content, cooling content, cooling
chemical sour or alkaline) ethanol based water with oily water with oily
additives also oil content up to products, e.g. anti corrosion anticorrosion
for water containing, 85 % ), aviation diesel, heating additives, additives,
treatment, low cooling water fuels, town gas oil up to+ 90° c, lubrication and lubrication and
concentrated with protective and natural aviation fuels, hydraulic oil, hydraulic
acids and oils against gas except petroleum up to seawater. oil, seawater.
alkalis, salt corrosion, liquefied + 60° c and
solutions, lubricating oil, petroleum gas gasoline up to+
technical grease and air, 40° c.
alcohols, esters compressed air
and ketones
Linear Butyl IIR / Chloroprene CR, NBR (nitrile), NBR ( nitrile), NBR ( nit rile ), HNBR ( nitrile ),
EPDM, seamless, seamless, seamless, seamless, seamless, high
seamless, low abrasion abrasion abrasion abrasion abrasion
permeation resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant
Reinforc PA textile cord PA textile cord PA textile cord PA textile cord Steel wire cord Steel wire cord
ement:
Temper -40° Cup to+ -25° Cup to+ - 20° Cup to+ -40° Cup to+ 20· Cup to+ - 35° Cup to+
ature(de 100° C, 90° C, 90° C 90° C, 90° C, 100° C,
pending temporarily temporarily up temporarily up temporarily temporarily up temporarily up
on up to+ 120° C to+ 100° C to+ 100° C upto + 100° C to+ 100° C. Fire to+ 120° C. Fire
medium resistant ( to ISO resistant to ISO
) 15540) up to 15540 up 30
30 min . and min .
800° C. at+ 800° C
Cover EPDM, ozone Chloroprene CR Chloroprene CR Chloroprene CR Ch loroprene CR Chloroprene CR
proof, heat
resistant
Nominal diameter DN, mm: from 25 to 1000
Lenght, mm: from 130 to 300
Nominal pressure PN, MPa: up to 1,6
Flanges: Swiveling, DIN PN 10 / 16, carbon steel, zinc plated, stainless steel, brass, bronze
More details please see Elaflex "Rubber Expansion Joints Catalogue - Group 4"
PoccirncK1u1 MOpcKou pcrnCTp cy.a.oxo.a. JlzoiJu11 A.Jf. /A. YaJrodi11

Russian Mari time Register of Shipping
( c~aMIIJillll, J.IHttIV!aJII,I)
name

External Fire Fighting System: Technical Manual & Drawings

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

External Fire Fighting System: Technical Manual & Drawings

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

External Fire Fighting System: Technical Manual & Drawings

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual & Drawings

External Fire Fighting System

FFS Order no: F 505286 A~H

Hull no.: MM001/002/003/004,

Fi-Fi Class: Bureau Veritas

Fire Fighting System (Far East) Pte Ltd

Project no. F505286A~H

Customer: Mark Marine & Investments - FZCO

Type of vessel: 40m Utility / Support Vessel Vessel Class BV

PROJECT ITEM NO. 01

ITEM NO. 01 FFS 600 LB

Product subjected to technical changes without prior notice. 1 of 2

Performance Data Key Features

Product subjected to technical changes without prior notice. 2 of 2

DN150 DIN PN16

Orig inal D at e : I s s u e d by : Ap proved by:

Dimensional Drawing 106A-23 sh.2

FI-FI MONITOR THROW CURVE

SEA WATER FLOW: 350 m3/h

MINIMUM HORIZONTAL RANGE AT WIND STILL CONDITIONS

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

Installation and Maintenance

Fire Water Monitor

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

1. Pictograms shown on monitor

Attention and caution.

Do not stand in front of the monitor while running.

Read and understand user manual.

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

2. Important Safety Information and Warnings

Pay attention to the various important warnings listed below.

Warning! Means potential risk of serious damage to personnel or objects.

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

FFS Service engineers are available from our global network.

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

4. Description FFS fire water monitor

Monitors can be equipped with various nozzles:

For safety precautions, installation and maintenance, see relevant chapters.

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

4.1. Fire water monitor main components (remotely controlled)

Standard Lifting points

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

4.2. Fire water monitor main components (manually controlled)

4.3. Identity plate

Monitor type Year of

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

4.4 Noise levels

Type FFS 600 FFS 1200 FFS 2400 FFS 3600

A-weighted emission sound pressure 72,5 74,0 72,5 73,5

4.5. Work area/sector

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

5.3. Before using monitor

5.4. Using monitor

5.5. After using monitor

5.6. During maintenance

Fire Fighting Systems AS Tel: +47 69 24 49 90

Detailed inspection of the monitor is recommended to be carried out monthly;

All bearings are permanently grease filled so re-lubrication is NOT needed.